# HG changeset patch
# User Christian Urban <christian dot urban at kcl dot ac dot uk>
# Date 1374905874 -7200
# Node ID 02b6fab379bae0e5bf844d22a9672a3d2c26266b
# Parent  00ac265b251bb723019fc81ff7e591cff74bf8b0
started journal version

diff -r 00ac265b251b -r 02b6fab379ba Journal/Paper.thy
--- /dev/null	Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
+++ b/Journal/Paper.thy	Sat Jul 27 08:17:54 2013 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,1695 @@
+(*<*)
+theory Paper
+imports "../thys/UTM" "../thys/Abacus_Defs"
+begin
+
+(*
+value "map (steps (1,[],[Oc]) ([(L,0),(L,2),(R,2),(R,0)],0)) [0 ..< 4]"
+*)
+hide_const (open) s 
+
+
+
+hide_const (open) Divides.adjust
+
+abbreviation
+  "update2 p a \<equiv> update a p"
+
+consts DUMMY::'a
+
+(* Theorems as inference rules from LaTeXsugar.thy *)
+notation (Rule output)
+  "==>"  ("\<^raw:\mbox{}\inferrule{\mbox{>_\<^raw:}}>\<^raw:{\mbox{>_\<^raw:}}>")
+
+syntax (Rule output)
+  "_bigimpl" :: "asms \<Rightarrow> prop \<Rightarrow> prop"
+  ("\<^raw:\mbox{}\inferrule{>_\<^raw:}>\<^raw:{\mbox{>_\<^raw:}}>")
+
+  "_asms" :: "prop \<Rightarrow> asms \<Rightarrow> asms" 
+  ("\<^raw:\mbox{>_\<^raw:}\\>/ _")
+
+  "_asm" :: "prop \<Rightarrow> asms" ("\<^raw:\mbox{>_\<^raw:}>")
+
+notation (Axiom output)
+  "Trueprop"  ("\<^raw:\mbox{}\inferrule{\mbox{}}{\mbox{>_\<^raw:}}>")
+
+notation (IfThen output)
+  "==>"  ("\<^raw:{\normalsize{}>If\<^raw:\,}> _/ \<^raw:{\normalsize \,>then\<^raw:\,}>/ _.")
+syntax (IfThen output)
+  "_bigimpl" :: "asms \<Rightarrow> prop \<Rightarrow> prop"
+  ("\<^raw:{\normalsize{}>If\<^raw:\,}> _ /\<^raw:{\normalsize \,>then\<^raw:\,}>/ _.")
+  "_asms" :: "prop \<Rightarrow> asms \<Rightarrow> asms" ("\<^raw:\mbox{>_\<^raw:}> /\<^raw:{\normalsize \,>and\<^raw:\,}>/ _")
+  "_asm" :: "prop \<Rightarrow> asms" ("\<^raw:\mbox{>_\<^raw:}>")
+
+notation (IfThenNoBox output)
+  "==>"  ("\<^raw:{\normalsize{}>If\<^raw:\,}> _/ \<^raw:{\normalsize \,>then\<^raw:\,}>/ _.")
+syntax (IfThenNoBox output)
+  "_bigimpl" :: "asms \<Rightarrow> prop \<Rightarrow> prop"
+  ("\<^raw:{\normalsize{}>If\<^raw:\,}> _ /\<^raw:{\normalsize \,>then\<^raw:\,}>/ _.")
+  "_asms" :: "prop \<Rightarrow> asms \<Rightarrow> asms" ("_ /\<^raw:{\normalsize \,>and\<^raw:\,}>/ _")
+  "_asm" :: "prop \<Rightarrow> asms" ("_")
+
+
+context uncomputable
+begin
+
+notation (latex output)
+  Cons ("_::_" [48,47] 48) and
+  set ("") and
+  W0 ("W\<^bsub>\<^raw:\hspace{-2pt}>Bk\<^esub>") and
+  W1 ("W\<^bsub>\<^raw:\hspace{-2pt}>Oc\<^esub>") and
+  update2 ("update") and
+  tm_wf0 ("wf") and
+  tcopy_begin ("cbegin") and
+  tcopy_loop ("cloop") and
+  tcopy_end ("cend") and
+  step0 ("step") and
+  tcontra ("contra") and
+  code_tcontra ("code contra") and
+  steps0 ("steps") and
+  adjust0 ("adjust") and
+  exponent ("_\<^bsup>_\<^esup>") and
+  tcopy ("copy") and 
+  tape_of ("\<langle>_\<rangle>") and 
+  tm_comp ("_ ; _") and 
+  DUMMY  ("\<^raw:\mbox{$\_\!\_\,$}>") and
+  inv_begin0 ("I\<^isub>0") and
+  inv_begin1 ("I\<^isub>1") and
+  inv_begin2 ("I\<^isub>2") and
+  inv_begin3 ("I\<^isub>3") and
+  inv_begin4 ("I\<^isub>4") and 
+  inv_begin ("I\<^bsub>cbegin\<^esub>") and
+  inv_loop1 ("J\<^isub>1") and
+  inv_loop0 ("J\<^isub>0") and
+  inv_end1 ("K\<^isub>1") and
+  inv_end0 ("K\<^isub>0") and
+  measure_begin_step ("M\<^bsub>cbegin\<^esub>") and
+  layout_of ("layout") and
+  findnth ("find'_nth") and
+  recf.id ("id\<^raw:\makebox[0mm]{\,\,\,\,>\<^isup>_\<^raw:}>\<^isub>_") and
+  Pr ("Pr\<^isup>_") and
+  Cn ("Cn\<^isup>_") and
+  Mn ("Mn\<^isup>_") and
+  rec_exec ("eval") and
+  tm_of_rec ("translate") and
+  listsum ("\<Sigma>")
+
+ 
+lemma inv_begin_print:
+  shows "s = 0 \<Longrightarrow> inv_begin n (s, tp) = inv_begin0 n tp" and
+        "s = 1 \<Longrightarrow> inv_begin n (s, tp) = inv_begin1 n tp" and 
+        "s = 2 \<Longrightarrow> inv_begin n (s, tp) = inv_begin2 n tp" and 
+        "s = 3 \<Longrightarrow> inv_begin n (s, tp) = inv_begin3 n tp" and 
+        "s = 4 \<Longrightarrow> inv_begin n (s, tp) = inv_begin4 n tp" and
+        "s \<notin> {0,1,2,3,4} \<Longrightarrow> inv_begin n (s, l, r) = False"
+apply(case_tac [!] tp)
+by (auto)
+
+
+lemma inv1: 
+  shows "0 < (n::nat) \<Longrightarrow> Turing_Hoare.assert_imp (inv_begin0 n) (inv_loop1 n)"
+unfolding Turing_Hoare.assert_imp_def
+unfolding inv_loop1.simps inv_begin0.simps
+apply(auto)
+apply(rule_tac x="1" in exI)
+apply(auto simp add: replicate.simps)
+done
+
+lemma inv2: 
+  shows "0 < n \<Longrightarrow> inv_loop0 n = inv_end1 n"
+apply(rule ext)
+apply(case_tac x)
+apply(simp add: inv_end1.simps)
+done
+
+
+lemma measure_begin_print:
+  shows "s = 2 \<Longrightarrow> measure_begin_step (s, l, r) = length r" and
+        "s = 3 \<Longrightarrow> measure_begin_step (s, l, r) = (if r = [] \<or> r = [Bk] then 1 else 0)" and
+        "s = 4 \<Longrightarrow> measure_begin_step (s, l, r) = length l" and 
+        "s \<notin> {2,3,4} \<Longrightarrow> measure_begin_step (s, l, r) = 0"
+by (simp_all)
+
+declare [[show_question_marks = false]]
+
+lemma nats2tape:
+  shows "<([]::nat list)> = []"
+  and "<[n]> = <n>"
+  and "ns \<noteq> [] \<Longrightarrow> <n#ns> = <(n::nat, ns)>"
+  and "<(n, m)> = <n> @ [Bk] @ <m>"
+  and "<[n, m]> = <(n, m)>"
+  and "<n> = Oc \<up> (n + 1)" 
+apply(auto simp add: tape_of_nat_pair tape_of_nl_abv tape_of_nat_abv tape_of_nat_list.simps)
+apply(case_tac ns)
+apply(auto simp add: tape_of_nat_pair tape_of_nat_abv)
+done 
+
+lemmas HR1 = 
+  Hoare_plus_halt[where ?S.0="R\<iota>" and ?A="p\<^isub>1" and B="p\<^isub>2"]
+
+lemmas HR2 =
+  Hoare_plus_unhalt[where ?A="p\<^isub>1" and B="p\<^isub>2"]
+
+lemma inv_begin01:
+  assumes "n > 1"
+  shows "inv_begin0 n (l, r) = (n > 1 \<and> (l, r) = (Oc \<up> (n - 2), [Oc, Oc, Bk, Oc]))"
+using assms by auto                          
+
+lemma inv_begin02:
+  assumes "n = 1"
+  shows "inv_begin0 n (l, r) = (n = 1 \<and> (l, r) = ([], [Bk, Oc, Bk, Oc]))"
+using assms by auto
+
+
+lemma layout:
+  shows "layout_of [] = []"
+  and   "layout_of ((Inc R\<iota>)#is) = (2 * R\<iota> + 9)#(layout_of is)"
+  and   "layout_of ((Dec R\<iota> l)#is) = (2 * R\<iota> + 16)#(layout_of is)"
+  and   "layout_of ((Goto l)#is) = 1#(layout_of is)"
+by(auto simp add: layout_of.simps length_of.simps)
+
+
+lemma adjust_simps:
+  shows "adjust0 p = map (\<lambda>(a, s). (a, if s = 0 then (Suc (length p div 2)) else s)) p"
+by(simp add: adjust.simps)
+
+fun clear :: "nat \<Rightarrow> nat \<Rightarrow> abc_prog"
+  where
+  "clear n e = [Dec n e, Goto 0]"
+
+partial_function (tailrec)
+  run
+where
+  "run p cf = (if (is_final cf) then cf else run p (step0 cf p))"
+
+lemma numeral2:
+  shows "11 = Suc 10"
+  and   "12 = Suc 11"
+  and   "13 = Suc 12"
+  and   "14 = Suc 13"
+  and   "15 = Suc 14"
+apply(arith)+
+done
+
+lemma tm_wf_simps:
+  "tm_wf0 p = (2 <=length p \<and> is_even(length p) \<and> (\<forall>(a,s) \<in> set p. s <= (length p) div 2))"
+apply(simp add: tm_wf.simps)
+done
+
+(*>*)
+
+section {* Introduction *}
+
+
+
+text {*
+
+%\noindent
+%We formalised in earlier work the correctness proofs for two
+%algorithms in Isabelle/HOL---one about type-checking in
+%LF~\cite{UrbanCheneyBerghofer11} and another about deciding requests
+%in access control~\cite{WuZhangUrban12}.  The formalisations
+%uncovered a gap in the informal correctness proof of the former and
+%made us realise that important details were left out in the informal
+%model for the latter. However, in both cases we were unable to
+%formalise in Isabelle/HOL computability arguments about the
+%algorithms. 
+
+%Suppose you want to mechanise a proof for whether a predicate @{term P}, 
+%say, is decidable or not. Decidability of @{text P} usually
+%amounts to showing whether \mbox{@{term "P \<or> \<not>P"}} holds. But this
+%does \emph{not} work in 
+
+
+%Since Isabelle/HOL and other HOL theorem provers,
+%are based on classical logic where the law of excluded
+%middle ensures that \mbox{@{term "P \<or> \<not>P"}} is always provable no
+%matter whether @{text P} is constructed by computable means. We hit on
+%this limitation previously when we mechanised the correctness proofs
+%of two algorithms \cite{UrbanCheneyBerghofer11,WuZhangUrban12}, but
+%were unable to formalise arguments about decidability or undecidability.
+
+%The same problem would arise if we had formulated
+%the algorithms as recursive functions, because internally in
+%Isabelle/HOL, like in all HOL-based theorem provers, functions are
+%represented as inductively defined predicates too.
+
+\noindent
+We like to enable Isabelle/HOL users to reason about computability
+theory.  Reasoning about decidability of predicates, for example, is not as
+straightforward as one might think in Isabelle/HOL and other HOL
+theorem provers, since they are based on classical logic where the law
+of excluded middle ensures that \mbox{@{term "P \<or> \<not>P"}} is always
+provable no matter whether the predicate @{text P} is constructed by
+computable means.
+
+Norrish formalised computability
+theory in HOL4. He choose the $\lambda$-calculus as the starting point
+for his formalisation because of its ``simplicity'' \cite[Page
+297]{Norrish11}.  Part of his formalisation is a clever infrastructure
+for reducing $\lambda$-terms. He also established the computational
+equivalence between the $\lambda$-calculus and recursive functions.
+Nevertheless he concluded that it would be appealing to have
+formalisations for more operational models of computations, such as
+Turing machines or register machines.  One reason is that many proofs
+in the literature use them.  He noted however that \cite[Page
+310]{Norrish11}:
+
+\begin{quote}
+\it``If register machines are unappealing because of their 
+general fiddliness,\\ Turing machines are an even more 
+daunting prospect.''
+\end{quote}
+
+\noindent
+In this paper we take on this daunting prospect and provide a
+formalisation of Turing machines, as well as abacus machines (a kind
+of register machines) and recursive functions. To see the difficulties
+involved with this work, one has to understand that Turing machine
+programs (similarly abacus programs) can be completely
+\emph{unstructured}, behaving similar to Basic programs containing the
+infamous goto \cite{Dijkstra68}. This precludes in the general case a
+compositional Hoare-style reasoning about Turing programs.  We provide
+such Hoare-rules for when it \emph{is} possible to reason in a
+compositional manner (which is fortunately quite often), but also
+tackle the more complicated case when we translate abacus programs
+into Turing programs.  This reasoning about concrete Turing machine
+programs is usually left out in the informal literature,
+e.g.~\cite{Boolos87}.
+
+%To see the difficulties
+%involved with this work, one has to understand that interactive
+%theorem provers, like Isabelle/HOL, are at their best when the
+%data-structures at hand are ``structurally'' defined, like lists,
+%natural numbers, regular expressions, etc. Such data-structures come
+%with convenient reasoning infrastructures (for example induction
+%principles, recursion combinators and so on).  But this is \emph{not}
+%the case with Turing machines (and also not with register machines):
+%underlying their definitions are sets of states together with 
+%transition functions, all of which are not structurally defined.  This
+%means we have to implement our own reasoning infrastructure in order
+%to prove properties about them. This leads to annoyingly fiddly
+%formalisations.  We noticed first the difference between both,
+%structural and non-structural, ``worlds'' when formalising the
+%Myhill-Nerode theorem, where regular expressions fared much better
+%than automata \cite{WuZhangUrban11}.  However, with Turing machines
+%there seems to be no alternative if one wants to formalise the great
+%many proofs from the literature that use them.  We will analyse one
+%example---undecidability of Wang's tiling problem---in Section~\ref{Wang}. The
+%standard proof of this property uses the notion of universal
+%Turing machines.
+
+We are not the first who formalised Turing machines: we are aware of
+the work by Asperti and Ricciotti \cite{AspertiRicciotti12}. They
+describe a complete formalisation of Turing machines in the Matita
+theorem prover, including a universal Turing machine. However, they do
+\emph{not} formalise the undecidability of the halting problem since
+their main focus is complexity, rather than computability theory. They
+also report that the informal proofs from which they started are not
+``sufficiently accurate to be directly usable as a guideline for
+formalization'' \cite[Page 2]{AspertiRicciotti12}. For our
+formalisation we follow mainly the proofs from the textbook by Boolos
+et al \cite{Boolos87} and found that the description there is quite
+detailed. Some details are left out however: for example, constructing
+the \emph{copy Turing machine} is left as an exercise to the
+reader---a corresponding correctness proof is not mentioned at all; also \cite{Boolos87}
+only shows how the universal Turing machine is constructed for Turing
+machines computing unary functions. We had to figure out a way to
+generalise this result to $n$-ary functions. Similarly, when compiling
+recursive functions to abacus machines, the textbook again only shows
+how it can be done for 2- and 3-ary functions, but in the
+formalisation we need arbitrary functions. But the general ideas for
+how to do this are clear enough in \cite{Boolos87}.
+%However, one
+%aspect that is completely left out from the informal description in
+%\cite{Boolos87}, and similar ones we are aware of, is arguments why certain Turing
+%machines are correct. We will introduce Hoare-style proof rules
+%which help us with such correctness arguments of Turing machines.
+
+The main difference between our formalisation and the one by Asperti
+and Ricciotti is that their universal Turing machine uses a different
+alphabet than the machines it simulates. They write \cite[Page
+23]{AspertiRicciotti12}:
+
+\begin{quote}\it
+``In particular, the fact that the universal machine operates with a
+different alphabet with respect to the machines it simulates is
+annoying.'' 
+\end{quote}
+
+\noindent
+In this paper we follow the approach by Boolos et al \cite{Boolos87},
+which goes back to Post \cite{Post36}, where all Turing machines
+operate on tapes that contain only \emph{blank} or \emph{occupied} cells. 
+Traditionally the content of a cell can be any
+character from a finite alphabet. Although computationally equivalent,
+the more restrictive notion of Turing machines in \cite{Boolos87} makes
+the reasoning more uniform. In addition some proofs \emph{about} Turing
+machines are simpler.  The reason is that one often needs to encode
+Turing machines---consequently if the Turing machines are simpler, then the coding
+functions are simpler too. Unfortunately, the restrictiveness also makes
+it harder to design programs for these Turing machines. In order
+to construct a universal Turing machine we therefore do not follow 
+\cite{AspertiRicciotti12}, instead follow the proof in
+\cite{Boolos87} by translating abacus machines to Turing machines and in
+turn recursive functions to abacus machines. The universal Turing
+machine can then be constructed by translating from a (universal) recursive function. 
+The part of mechanising the translation of recursive function to register 
+machines has already been done by Zammit in HOL4 \cite{Zammit99}, 
+although his register machines use a slightly different instruction
+set than the one described in \cite{Boolos87}.
+
+\smallskip
+\noindent
+{\bf Contributions:} We formalised in Isabelle/HOL Turing machines
+following the description of Boolos et al \cite{Boolos87} where tapes
+only have blank or occupied cells. We mechanise the undecidability of
+the halting problem and prove the correctness of concrete Turing
+machines that are needed in this proof; such correctness proofs are
+left out in the informal literature.  For reasoning about Turing
+machine programs we derive Hoare-rules.  We also construct the
+universal Turing machine from \cite{Boolos87} by translating recursive
+functions to abacus machines and abacus machines to Turing
+machines. This works essentially like a small, verified compiler 
+from recursive functions to Turing machine programs.
+When formalising the universal Turing machine,
+we stumbled in \cite{Boolos87} upon an inconsistent use of the definition of
+what partial function a Turing machine calculates. 
+
+%Since we have set up in
+%Isabelle/HOL a very general computability model and undecidability
+%result, we are able to formalise other results: we describe a proof of
+%the computational equivalence of single-sided Turing machines, which
+%is not given in \cite{Boolos87}, but needed for example for
+%formalising the undecidability proof of Wang's tiling problem
+%\cite{Robinson71}.  %We are not aware of any other %formalisation of a
+%substantial undecidability problem.
+*}
+
+section {* Turing Machines *}
+
+text {* \noindent
+  Turing machines can be thought of as having a \emph{head},
+  ``gliding'' over a potentially infinite tape. Boolos et
+  al~\cite{Boolos87} only consider tapes with cells being either blank
+  or occupied, which we represent by a datatype having two
+  constructors, namely @{text Bk} and @{text Oc}.  One way to
+  represent such tapes is to use a pair of lists, written @{term "(l,
+  r)"}, where @{term l} stands for the tape on the left-hand side of
+  the head and @{term r} for the tape on the right-hand side.  We use
+  the notation @{term "Bk \<up> n"} (similarly @{term "Oc \<up> n"}) for lists
+  composed of @{term n} elements of @{term Bk}s.  We also have the
+  convention that the head, abbreviated @{term hd}, of the right list
+  is the cell on which the head of the Turing machine currently
+  scans. This can be pictured as follows:
+  %
+  \begin{center}
+  \begin{tikzpicture}[scale=0.9]
+  \draw[very thick] (-3.0,0)   -- ( 3.0,0);
+  \draw[very thick] (-3.0,0.5) -- ( 3.0,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] (-0.25,0)   -- (-0.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 0.25,0)   -- ( 0.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] (-0.75,0)   -- (-0.75,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 0.75,0)   -- ( 0.75,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] (-1.25,0)   -- (-1.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 1.25,0)   -- ( 1.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] (-1.75,0)   -- (-1.75,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 1.75,0)   -- ( 1.75,0.5);
+  \draw[rounded corners=1mm] (-0.35,-0.1) rectangle (0.35,0.6);
+  \draw[fill]     (1.35,0.1) rectangle (1.65,0.4);
+  \draw[fill]     (0.85,0.1) rectangle (1.15,0.4);
+  \draw[fill]     (-0.35,0.1) rectangle (-0.65,0.4);
+  \draw[fill]     (-1.65,0.1) rectangle (-1.35,0.4);
+  \draw (-0.25,0.8) -- (-0.25,-0.8);
+  \draw[<->] (-1.25,-0.7) -- (0.75,-0.7);
+  \node [anchor=base] at (-0.85,-0.5) {\small left list};
+  \node [anchor=base] at (0.40,-0.5) {\small right list};
+  \node [anchor=base] at (0.1,0.7) {\small head};
+  \node [anchor=base] at (-2.2,0.2) {\ldots};
+  \node [anchor=base] at ( 2.3,0.2) {\ldots};
+  \end{tikzpicture}
+  \end{center}
+  
+  \noindent
+  Note that by using lists each side of the tape is only finite. The
+  potential infinity is achieved by adding an appropriate blank or occupied cell 
+  whenever the head goes over the ``edge'' of the tape. To 
+  make this formal we define five possible \emph{actions} 
+  the Turing machine can perform:
+
+  \begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}[t]{@ {}rcl@ {\hspace{2mm}}l}
+  @{text "a"} & $::=$  & @{term "W0"} & (write blank, @{term Bk})\\
+  & $\mid$ & @{term "W1"} & (write occupied, @{term Oc})\\
+  & $\mid$ & @{term L} & (move left)\\
+  & $\mid$ & @{term R} & (move right)\\
+  & $\mid$ & @{term Nop} & (do-nothing operation)\\
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  We slightly deviate
+  from the presentation in \cite{Boolos87} (and also \cite{AspertiRicciotti12}) 
+  by using the @{term Nop} operation; however its use
+  will become important when we formalise halting computations and also universal Turing 
+  machines.  Given a tape and an action, we can define the
+  following tape updating function:
+
+  \begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}{l@ {\hspace{1mm}}c@ {\hspace{1mm}}l}
+  @{thm (lhs) update.simps(1)} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) update.simps(1)}\\
+  @{thm (lhs) update.simps(2)} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) update.simps(2)}\\
+  @{thm (lhs) update.simps(3)} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) update.simps(3)}\\
+  @{thm (lhs) update.simps(4)} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) update.simps(4)}\\
+  @{thm (lhs) update.simps(5)} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) update.simps(5)}\\
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  The first two clauses replace the head of the right list
+  with a new @{term Bk} or @{term Oc}, respectively. To see that
+  these two clauses make sense in case where @{text r} is the empty
+  list, one has to know that the tail function, @{term tl}, is defined
+  such that @{term "tl [] == []"} holds. The third clause 
+  implements the move of the head one step to the left: we need
+  to test if the left-list @{term l} is empty; if yes, then we just prepend a 
+  blank cell to the right list; otherwise we have to remove the
+  head from the left-list and prepend it to the right list. Similarly
+  in the fourth clause for a right move action. The @{term Nop} operation
+  leaves the tape unchanged.
+
+  %Note that our treatment of the tape is rather ``unsymmetric''---we
+  %have the convention that the head of the right list is where the
+  %head is currently positioned. Asperti and Ricciotti
+  %\cite{AspertiRicciotti12} also considered such a representation, but
+  %dismiss it as it complicates their definition for \emph{tape
+  %equality}. The reason is that moving the head one step to
+  %the left and then back to the right might change the tape (in case
+  %of going over the ``edge''). Therefore they distinguish four types
+  %of tapes: one where the tape is empty; another where the head
+  %is on the left edge, respectively right edge, and in the middle
+  %of the tape. The reading, writing and moving of the tape is then
+  %defined in terms of these four cases.  In this way they can keep the
+  %tape in a ``normalised'' form, and thus making a left-move followed
+  %by a right-move being the identity on tapes. Since we are not using
+  %the notion of tape equality, we can get away with the unsymmetric
+  %definition above, and by using the @{term update} function
+  %cover uniformly all cases including corner cases.
+
+  Next we need to define the \emph{states} of a Turing machine.  
+  %Given
+  %how little is usually said about how to represent them in informal
+  %presentations, it might be surprising that in a theorem prover we
+  %have to select carefully a representation. If we use the naive
+  %representation where a Turing machine consists of a finite set of
+  %states, then we will have difficulties composing two Turing
+  %machines: we would need to combine two finite sets of states,
+  %possibly renaming states apart whenever both machines share
+  %states.\footnote{The usual disjoint union operation in Isabelle/HOL
+  %cannot be used as it does not preserve types.} This renaming can be
+  %quite cumbersome to reason about. 
+  We follow the choice made in \cite{AspertiRicciotti12} 
+  by representing a state with a natural number and the states in a Turing
+  machine program by the initial segment of natural numbers starting from @{text 0}.
+  In doing so we can compose two Turing machine programs by
+  shifting the states of one by an appropriate amount to a higher
+  segment and adjusting some ``next states'' in the other. 
+
+  An \emph{instruction} of a Turing machine is a pair consisting of 
+  an action and a natural number (the next state). A \emph{program} @{term p} of a Turing
+  machine is then a list of such pairs. Using as an example the following Turing machine
+  program, which consists of four instructions
+  %
+  \begin{equation}
+  \begin{tikzpicture}
+  \node [anchor=base] at (0,0) {@{thm dither_def}};
+  \node [anchor=west] at (-1.5,-0.64) 
+  {$\underbrace{\hspace{21mm}}_{\text{\begin{tabular}{@ {}l@ {}}1st state\\[-2mm] 
+  = starting state\end{tabular}}}$};
+  
+  \node [anchor=west] at ( 1.1,-0.42) {$\underbrace{\hspace{17mm}}_{\text{2nd state}}$};
+  \node [anchor=west] at (-1.5,0.65) {$\overbrace{\hspace{10mm}}^{\text{@{term Bk}-case}}$};
+  \node [anchor=west] at (-0.1,0.65) {$\overbrace{\hspace{6mm}}^{\text{@{term Oc}-case}}$};
+  \end{tikzpicture}
+  \label{dither}
+  \end{equation}
+  %
+  \noindent
+  the reader can see we have organised our Turing machine programs so
+  that segments of two pairs belong to a state. The first component of such a
+  segment determines what action should be taken and which next state
+  should be transitioned to in case the head reads a @{term Bk};
+  similarly the second component determines what should be done in
+  case of reading @{term Oc}. We have the convention that the first
+  state is always the \emph{starting state} of the Turing machine.
+  The @{text 0}-state is special in that it will be used as the
+  ``halting state''.  There are no instructions for the @{text
+  0}-state, but it will always perform a @{term Nop}-operation and
+  remain in the @{text 0}-state.  
+  We have chosen a very concrete
+  representation for Turing machine programs, because when constructing a universal
+  Turing machine, we need to define a coding function for programs.
+  %This can be directly done for our programs-as-lists, but is
+  %slightly more difficult for the functions used by Asperti and Ricciotti.
+
+  Given a program @{term p}, a state
+  and the cell being scanned by the head, we need to fetch
+  the corresponding instruction from the program. For this we define 
+  the function @{term fetch}
+ 
+  \begin{equation}\label{fetch}
+  \mbox{\begin{tabular}{l@ {\hspace{1mm}}c@ {\hspace{1mm}}l}
+  \multicolumn{3}{l}{@{thm fetch.simps(1)[where b=DUMMY]}}\\
+  @{thm (lhs) fetch.simps(2)} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{text "case nth_of p (2 * s) of"}\\
+  \multicolumn{3}{@ {\hspace{4cm}}l}{@{text "None \<Rightarrow> (Nop, 0) | Some i \<Rightarrow> i"}}\\
+  @{thm (lhs) fetch.simps(3)} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{text "case nth_of p (2 * s + 1) of"}\\
+  \multicolumn{3}{@ {\hspace{4cm}}l}{@{text "None \<Rightarrow> (Nop, 0) | Some i \<Rightarrow> i"}}
+  \end{tabular}}
+  \end{equation}
+
+  \noindent
+  In this definition the function @{term nth_of} returns the @{text n}th element
+  from a list, provided it exists (@{term Some}-case), or if it does not, it
+  returns the default action @{term Nop} and the default state @{text 0} 
+  (@{term None}-case). We often have to restrict Turing machine programs 
+  to be well-formed: a program @{term p} is \emph{well-formed} if it 
+  satisfies the following three properties:
+
+  \begin{center}
+  @{thm tm_wf_simps[where p="p", THEN eq_reflection]}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  The first states that @{text p} must have at least an instruction for the starting 
+  state; the second that @{text p} has a @{term Bk} and @{term Oc} instruction for every 
+  state, and the third that every next-state is one of the states mentioned in
+  the program or being the @{text 0}-state.
+
+ 
+  A \emph{configuration} @{term c} of a Turing machine is a state
+  together with a tape. This is written as @{text "(s, (l, r))"}.  We
+  say a configuration \emph{is final} if @{term "s = (0::nat)"} and we
+  say a predicate @{text P} \emph{holds for} a configuration if @{text
+  "P"} holds for the tape @{text "(l, r)"}.  If we have a configuration and a program, we can
+  calculate what the next configuration is by fetching the appropriate
+  action and next state from the program, and by updating the state
+  and tape accordingly.  This single step of execution is defined as
+  the function @{term step}
+
+  \begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}{l@ {\hspace{1mm}}c@ {\hspace{1mm}}l}
+  @{text "step (s, (l, r)) p"} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{text "let (a, s') = fetch p s (read r)"}\\
+  & & @{text "in (s', update (l, r) a)"}
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  where @{term "read r"} returns the head of the list @{text r}, or if
+  @{text r} is empty it returns @{term Bk}.  
+  We lift this definition to an evaluation function that performs 
+  exactly @{text n} steps:
+
+  \begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}{l@ {\hspace{1mm}}c@ {\hspace{1mm}}l}
+  @{thm (lhs) steps.simps(1)} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) steps.simps(1)}\\
+  @{thm (lhs) steps.simps(2)} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) steps.simps(2)}\\
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent Recall our definition of @{term fetch} (shown in
+  \eqref{fetch}) with the default value for the @{text 0}-state. In
+  case a Turing program takes according to the usual textbook
+  definition, say \cite{Boolos87}, less than @{text n} steps before it
+  halts, then in our setting the @{term steps}-evaluation does not
+  actually halt, but rather transitions to the @{text 0}-state (the
+  final state) and remains there performing @{text Nop}-actions until
+  @{text n} is reached. 
+
+
+  We often need to restrict tapes to be in standard form, which means 
+  the left list of the tape is either empty or only contains @{text "Bk"}s, and 
+  the right list contains some ``clusters'' of @{text "Oc"}s separated by single 
+  blanks. To make this formal we define the following overloaded function
+  encoding natural numbers into lists of @{term "Oc"}s and @{term Bk}s.
+  % 
+  \begin{equation}
+  \mbox{\begin{tabular}[t]{@ {}l@ {\hspace{1mm}}c@ {\hspace{1mm}}l@ {}}
+  @{thm (lhs) nats2tape(6)} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) nats2tape(6)}\\
+  @{thm (lhs) nats2tape(4)} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) nats2tape(4)}\\
+  \end{tabular}\hspace{6mm}
+  \begin{tabular}[t]{@ {}l@ {\hspace{1mm}}c@ {\hspace{1mm}}l@ {}}
+  @{thm (lhs) nats2tape(1)} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) nats2tape(1)}\\
+  @{thm (lhs) nats2tape(2)} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) nats2tape(2)}\\
+  @{thm (lhs) nats2tape(3)} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) nats2tape(3)}
+  \end{tabular}}\label{standard}
+  \end{equation}
+  %
+  \noindent
+  A \emph{standard tape} is then of the form @{text "(Bk\<^isup>k,\<langle>[n\<^isub>1,...,n\<^isub>m]\<rangle> @ Bk\<^isup>l)"} for some @{text k}, 
+  @{text l} 
+  and @{text "n\<^bsub>1...m\<^esub>"}. Note that the head in a standard tape ``points'' to the 
+  leftmost @{term "Oc"} on the tape. Note also that the natural number @{text 0} 
+  is represented by a single filled cell on a standard tape, @{text 1} by two filled cells and so on.
+
+
+ We need to be able to sequentially compose Turing machine programs. Given our
+  concrete representation, this is relatively straightforward, if
+  slightly fiddly. We use the following two auxiliary functions:
+
+  \begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}{@ {}l@ {\hspace{1mm}}c@ {\hspace{1mm}}l@ {}}
+  @{thm (lhs) shift.simps} @{text "\<equiv>"} @{thm (rhs) shift.simps}\\
+  @{thm (lhs) adjust_simps} @{text "\<equiv>"} @{thm (rhs) adjust_simps}\\
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  The first adds @{text n} to all states, except the @{text 0}-state,
+  thus moving all ``regular'' states to the segment starting at @{text
+  n}; the second adds @{term "Suc(length p div 2)"} to the @{text
+  0}-state, thus redirecting all references to the ``halting state''
+  to the first state after the program @{text p}.  With these two
+  functions in place, we can define the \emph{sequential composition}
+  of two Turing machine programs @{text "p\<^isub>1"} and @{text "p\<^isub>2"} as
+
+  \begin{center}
+  @{thm tm_comp.simps[where ?p1.0="p\<^isub>1" and ?p2.0="p\<^isub>2", THEN eq_reflection]}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  %This means @{text "p\<^isub>1"} is executed first. Whenever it originally
+  %transitioned to the @{text 0}-state, it will in the composed program transition to the starting
+  %state of @{text "p\<^isub>2"} instead. All the states of @{text "p\<^isub>2"}
+  %have been shifted in order to make sure that the states of the composed 
+  %program @{text "p\<^isub>1 \<oplus> p\<^isub>2"} still only ``occupy'' 
+  %an initial segment of the natural numbers.
+  
+  \begin{figure}[t]
+  \begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}{@ {}c@ {\hspace{3mm}}c@ {\hspace{3mm}}c}
+  \begin{tabular}[t]{@ {}l@ {}}
+  @{thm (lhs) tcopy_begin_def} @{text "\<equiv>"}\\
+  \hspace{2mm}@{text "["}@{text "(W\<^bsub>Bk\<^esub>, 0), (R, 2), (R, 3),"}\\
+  \hspace{2mm}\phantom{@{text "["}}@{text "(R, 2), (W\<^bsub>Oc\<^esub>, 3), (L, 4),"}\\
+  \hspace{2mm}\phantom{@{text "["}}@{text "(L, 4), (L, 0)"}@{text "]"} 
+  \end{tabular}
+  &
+  \begin{tabular}[t]{@ {}l@ {}}
+  @{thm (lhs) tcopy_loop_def} @{text "\<equiv>"}\\
+  \hspace{2mm}@{text "["}@{text "(R, 0), (R, 2), (R, 3),"}\\
+  \hspace{2mm}\phantom{@{text "["}}@{text "(W\<^bsub>Bk\<^esub>, 2), (R, 3), (R, 4),"}\\
+  \hspace{2mm}\phantom{@{text "["}}@{text "(W\<^bsub>Oc\<^esub>, 5), (R, 4), (L, 6),"}\\
+  \hspace{2mm}\phantom{@{text "["}}@{text "(L, 5), (L, 6), (L, 1)"}@{text "]"} 
+  \end{tabular}
+  &
+  \begin{tabular}[t]{@ {}l@ {}}
+  @{thm (lhs) tcopy_end_def} @{text "\<equiv>"}\\
+  \hspace{2mm}@{text "["}@{text "(L, 0), (R, 2), (W\<^bsub>Oc\<^esub>, 3),"}\\
+  \hspace{2mm}\phantom{@{text "["}}@{text "(L, 4), (R, 2), (R, 2),"}\\
+  \hspace{2mm}\phantom{@{text "["}}@{text "(L, 5), (W\<^bsub>Bk\<^esub>, 4), (R, 0),"}\\
+  \hspace{2mm}\phantom{@{text "["}}@{text "(L, 5)"}@{text "]"} 
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{tabular}\\[2mm]
+
+  \begin{tikzpicture}[scale=0.7]
+  \node [anchor=base] at (2.2,0.1) {\small$\Rightarrow$};
+  \node [anchor=base] at (5.6,0.1) {\small$\Rightarrow$};
+  \node [anchor=base] at (10.5,0.1) {\small$\Rightarrow$};
+  \node [anchor=base] at (2.2,-0.6) {\small$\overbrace{@{term "tcopy_begin"}}^{}$};
+  \node [anchor=base] at (5.6,-0.6) {\small$\overbrace{@{term "tcopy_loop"}}^{}$};
+  \node [anchor=base] at (10.5,-0.6) {\small$\overbrace{@{term "tcopy_end"}}^{}$};
+
+
+  \begin{scope}[shift={(0.5,0)}]
+  \draw[very thick] (-0.25,0)   -- ( 1.25,0);
+  \draw[very thick] (-0.25,0.5) -- ( 1.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] (-0.25,0)   -- (-0.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 0.25,0)   -- ( 0.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 0.75,0)   -- ( 0.75,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 1.25,0)   -- ( 1.25,0.5);
+  \draw[rounded corners=1mm] (-0.35,-0.1) rectangle (0.35,0.6);
+  \draw[fill]     (-0.15,0.1) rectangle (0.15,0.4);
+  \draw[fill]     ( 0.35,0.1) rectangle (0.65,0.4);
+  \draw[fill]     ( 0.85,0.1) rectangle (1.15,0.4);
+  \end{scope}
+
+  \begin{scope}[shift={(2.9,0)}]
+  \draw[very thick] (-0.25,0)   -- ( 2.25,0);
+  \draw[very thick] (-0.25,0.5) -- ( 2.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] (-0.25,0)   -- (-0.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 0.25,0)   -- ( 0.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 0.75,0)   -- ( 0.75,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 1.25,0)   -- ( 1.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 1.75,0)   -- ( 1.75,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 2.25,0)   -- ( 2.25,0.5);
+  \draw[rounded corners=1mm] (0.15,-0.1) rectangle (0.85,0.6);
+  \draw[fill]     (-0.15,0.1) rectangle (0.15,0.4);
+  \draw[fill]     ( 0.35,0.1) rectangle (0.65,0.4);
+  \draw[fill]     ( 0.85,0.1) rectangle (1.15,0.4);
+  \draw[fill]     ( 1.85,0.1) rectangle (2.15,0.4);
+  \end{scope}
+
+  \begin{scope}[shift={(6.8,0)}]
+  \draw[very thick] (-0.75,0)   -- ( 3.25,0);
+  \draw[very thick] (-0.75,0.5) -- ( 3.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] (-0.75,0)   -- (-0.75,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] (-0.25,0)   -- (-0.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 0.25,0)   -- ( 0.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 0.75,0)   -- ( 0.75,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 1.25,0)   -- ( 1.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 1.75,0)   -- ( 1.75,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 2.25,0)   -- ( 2.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 2.75,0)   -- ( 2.75,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 3.25,0)   -- ( 3.25,0.5);
+  \draw[rounded corners=1mm] (-0.35,-0.1) rectangle (0.35,0.6);
+  \draw[fill]     (-0.15,0.1) rectangle (0.15,0.4);
+  \draw[fill]     ( 2.35,0.1) rectangle (2.65,0.4);
+  \draw[fill]     ( 2.85,0.1) rectangle (3.15,0.4);
+  \draw[fill]     ( 1.85,0.1) rectangle (2.15,0.4);
+  \end{scope}
+
+  \begin{scope}[shift={(11.7,0)}]
+  \draw[very thick] (-0.75,0)   -- ( 3.25,0);
+  \draw[very thick] (-0.75,0.5) -- ( 3.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] (-0.75,0)   -- (-0.75,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] (-0.25,0)   -- (-0.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 0.25,0)   -- ( 0.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 0.75,0)   -- ( 0.75,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 1.25,0)   -- ( 1.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 1.75,0)   -- ( 1.75,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 2.25,0)   -- ( 2.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 2.75,0)   -- ( 2.75,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 3.25,0)   -- ( 3.25,0.5);
+  \draw[rounded corners=1mm] (-0.35,-0.1) rectangle (0.35,0.6);
+  \draw[fill]     (-0.15,0.1) rectangle (0.15,0.4);
+  \draw[fill]     ( 2.35,0.1) rectangle (2.65,0.4);
+  \draw[fill]     ( 2.85,0.1) rectangle (3.15,0.4);
+  \draw[fill]     ( 1.85,0.1) rectangle (2.15,0.4);
+  \draw[fill]     ( 0.35,0.1) rectangle (0.65,0.4);
+  \draw[fill]     ( 0.85,0.1) rectangle (1.15,0.4);
+  \end{scope}
+  \end{tikzpicture}\\[-8mm]\mbox{} 
+  \end{center}
+  \caption{The three components of the \emph{copy Turing machine} (above). If started 
+  (below) with the tape @{term "([], <(2::nat)>)"} the first machine appends @{term "[Bk, Oc]"} at 
+  the end of the right tape; the second then ``moves'' all @{term Oc}s except the 
+  first from the beginning of the tape to the end; the third ``refills'' the original 
+  block of @{term "Oc"}s. The resulting tape is @{term "([Bk], <(2::nat, 2::nat)>)"}.}
+  \label{copy}
+  \end{figure}
+
+
+
+
+  Before we can prove the undecidability of the halting problem for
+  our Turing machines working on standard tapes, we have to analyse
+  two concrete Turing machine programs and establish that they are
+  correct---that means they are ``doing what they are supposed to be
+  doing''.  Such correctness proofs are usually left out in the
+  informal literature, for example \cite{Boolos87}.  The first program
+  we need to prove correct is the @{term dither} program shown in
+  \eqref{dither} and the second program is @{term "tcopy"} defined as
+
+  \begin{equation}
+  \mbox{\begin{tabular}{@ {}l@ {\hspace{1mm}}c@ {\hspace{1mm}}l@ {}}
+  @{thm (lhs) tcopy_def} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) tcopy_def}
+  \end{tabular}}\label{tcopy}
+  \end{equation}
+
+  \noindent
+  whose three components are given in Figure~\ref{copy}. For our
+  correctness proofs, we introduce the notion of total correctness
+  defined in terms of \emph{Hoare-triples}, written @{term "{P} (p::tprog0)
+  {Q}"}.  They implement the idea that a program @{term
+  p} started in state @{term "1::nat"} with a tape satisfying @{term
+  P} will after some @{text n} steps halt (have transitioned into the
+  halting state) with a tape satisfying @{term Q}. This idea is very
+  similar to the notion of \emph{realisability} in \cite{AspertiRicciotti12}. We
+  also have \emph{Hoare-pairs} of the form @{term "{P} (p::tprog0) \<up>"}
+  implementing the case that a program @{term p} started with a tape
+  satisfying @{term P} will loop (never transition into the halting
+  state). Both notion are formally defined as
+
+  \begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}{@ {}c@ {\hspace{4mm}}c@ {}}
+  \begin{tabular}[t]{@ {}l@ {}}
+  \colorbox{mygrey}{@{thm (lhs) Hoare_halt_def}} @{text "\<equiv>"}\\[1mm]
+  \hspace{5mm}@{text "\<forall>"}@{term "tp"}.\\
+  \hspace{7mm}if @{term "P tp"} holds then\\
+  \hspace{7mm}@{text "\<exists>"}@{term n}. such that\\
+  \hspace{7mm}@{text "is_final (steps (1, tp) p n)"} \hspace{1mm}@{text "\<and>"}\\
+  \hspace{7mm}@{text "Q holds_for (steps (1, tp) p n)"}
+  \end{tabular} &
+  \begin{tabular}[t]{@ {}l@ {}}
+  \colorbox{mygrey}{@{thm (lhs) Hoare_unhalt_def}} @{text "\<equiv>"}\\[1mm]
+  \hspace{5mm}@{text "\<forall>"}@{term "tp"}.\\ 
+  \hspace{7mm}if @{term "P tp"} holds then\\
+  \hspace{7mm}@{text "\<forall>"}@{term n}. @{text "\<not> is_final (steps (1, tp) p n)"}
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{center}
+  
+  \noindent
+  For our Hoare-triples we can easily prove the following Hoare-consequence rule
+
+  \begin{equation}
+  @{thm[mode=Rule] Hoare_consequence}
+  \end{equation}
+
+  \noindent
+  where
+  @{term "Turing_Hoare.assert_imp P' P"} stands for the fact that for all tapes @{term "tp"},
+  @{term "P' tp"} implies @{term "P tp"} (similarly for @{text "Q"} and @{text "Q'"}).
+
+  Like Asperti and Ricciotti with their notion of realisability, we
+  have set up our Hoare-rules so that we can deal explicitly
+  with total correctness and non-termination, rather than have
+  notions for partial correctness and termination. Although the latter
+  would allow us to reason more uniformly (only using Hoare-triples),
+  we prefer our definitions because we can derive below some simple
+  Hoare-rules for sequentially composed Turing programs.  In this way
+  we can reason about the correctness of @{term "tcopy_begin"}, for
+  example, completely separately from @{term "tcopy_loop"} and @{term
+  "tcopy_end"}.
+
+  It is relatively straightforward to prove that the Turing program 
+  @{term "dither"} shown in \eqref{dither} is correct. This program
+  should be the ``identity'' when started with a standard tape representing 
+  @{text "1"} but loops when started with the @{text 0}-representation instead, as pictured 
+  below.
+
+
+  \begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}{l@ {\hspace{3mm}}lcl}
+  & \multicolumn{1}{c}{start tape}\\[1mm]
+  \raisebox{2mm}{halting case:} &
+  \begin{tikzpicture}[scale=0.8]
+  \draw[very thick] (-2,0)   -- ( 0.75,0);
+  \draw[very thick] (-2,0.5) -- ( 0.75,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] (-0.25,0)   -- (-0.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 0.25,0)   -- ( 0.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] (-0.75,0)   -- (-0.75,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 0.75,0)   -- ( 0.75,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] (-1.25,0)   -- (-1.25,0.5);
+  \draw[rounded corners=1mm] (-0.35,-0.1) rectangle (0.35,0.6);
+  \draw[fill]     (-0.15,0.1) rectangle (0.15,0.4);
+  \draw[fill]     ( 0.35,0.1) rectangle (0.65,0.4);
+  \node [anchor=base] at (-1.7,0.2) {\ldots};
+  \end{tikzpicture} 
+  & \raisebox{2mm}{$\;\;\large\Rightarrow\;\;$} &
+  \begin{tikzpicture}[scale=0.8]
+  \draw[very thick] (-2,0)   -- ( 0.75,0);
+  \draw[very thick] (-2,0.5) -- ( 0.75,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] (-0.25,0)   -- (-0.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 0.25,0)   -- ( 0.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] (-0.75,0)   -- (-0.75,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 0.75,0)   -- ( 0.75,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] (-1.25,0)   -- (-1.25,0.5);
+  \draw[rounded corners=1mm] (-0.35,-0.1) rectangle (0.35,0.6);
+  \draw[fill]     (-0.15,0.1) rectangle (0.15,0.4);
+  \draw[fill]     ( 0.35,0.1) rectangle (0.65,0.4);
+  \node [anchor=base] at (-1.7,0.2) {\ldots};
+  \end{tikzpicture}\\
+
+  \raisebox{2mm}{non-halting case:} &
+  \begin{tikzpicture}[scale=0.8]
+  \draw[very thick] (-2,0)   -- ( 0.25,0);
+  \draw[very thick] (-2,0.5) -- ( 0.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] (-0.25,0)   -- (-0.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] ( 0.25,0)   -- ( 0.25,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] (-0.75,0)   -- (-0.75,0.5);
+  \draw[very thick] (-1.25,0)   -- (-1.25,0.5);
+  \draw[rounded corners=1mm] (-0.35,-0.1) rectangle (0.35,0.6);
+  \draw[fill]     (-0.15,0.1) rectangle (0.15,0.4);
+  \node [anchor=base] at (-1.7,0.2) {\ldots};
+  \end{tikzpicture} 
+  & \raisebox{2mm}{$\;\;\large\Rightarrow\;\;$} &
+  \raisebox{2mm}{loops}
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  We can prove the following two Hoare-statements:
+ 
+  \begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}{l}
+  @{thm dither_halts}\\
+  @{thm dither_loops}
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  The first is by a simple calculation. The second is by an induction on the
+  number of steps we can perform starting from the input tape.
+
+  The program @{term tcopy} defined in \eqref{tcopy} has 15 states;
+  its purpose is to produce the standard tape @{term "(Bks, <(n,
+  n::nat)>)"} when started with @{term "(Bks, <(n::nat)>)"}, that is
+  making a copy of a value @{term n} on the tape.  Reasoning about this program
+  is substantially harder than about @{term dither}. To ease the
+  burden, we derive the following two Hoare-rules for sequentially
+  composed programs.
+
+  \begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}{@ {\hspace{-10mm}}c@ {\hspace{14mm}}c@ {}}
+  $\inferrule*[Right=@{thm (prem 3) HR1}]
+  {@{thm (prem 1) HR1} \\ @{thm (prem 2) HR1}}
+  {@{thm (concl) HR1}}
+  $ &
+  $
+  \inferrule*[Right=@{thm (prem 3) HR2}]
+  {@{thm (prem 1) HR2} \\ @{thm (prem 2) HR2}}
+  {@{thm (concl) HR2}}
+  $
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  The first corresponds to the usual Hoare-rule for composition of two
+  terminating programs. The second rule gives the conditions for when
+  the first program terminates generating a tape for which the second
+  program loops.  The side-conditions about @{thm (prem 3) HR2} are
+  needed in order to ensure that the redirection of the halting and
+  initial state in @{term "p\<^isub>1"} and @{term "p\<^isub>2"}, respectively, match
+  up correctly.  These Hoare-rules allow us to prove the correctness
+  of @{term tcopy} by considering the correctness of the components
+  @{term "tcopy_begin"}, @{term "tcopy_loop"} and @{term "tcopy_end"}
+  in isolation. This simplifies the reasoning considerably, for
+  example when designing decreasing measures for proving the termination
+  of the programs.  We will show the details for the program @{term
+  "tcopy_begin"}. For the two other programs we refer the reader to
+  our formalisation.
+
+  Given the invariants @{term "inv_begin0"},\ldots,
+  @{term "inv_begin4"} shown in Figure~\ref{invbegin}, which
+  correspond to each state of @{term tcopy_begin}, we define the
+  following invariant for the whole @{term tcopy_begin} program:
+
+  \begin{figure}[t]
+  \begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}{@ {}lcl@ {\hspace{-0.5cm}}l@ {}}
+  \hline
+  @{thm (lhs) inv_begin1.simps} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) inv_begin1.simps} & (starting state)\\
+  @{thm (lhs) inv_begin2.simps} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) inv_begin2.simps}\\
+  @{thm (lhs) inv_begin3.simps} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) inv_begin3.simps}\\
+  @{thm (lhs) inv_begin4.simps} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) inv_begin4.simps}\\
+  @{thm (lhs) inv_begin0.simps} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) inv_begin01} @{text "\<or>"}& (halting state)\\
+                                &             & @{thm (rhs) inv_begin02}\smallskip \\
+   \hline
+  @{thm (lhs) inv_loop1.simps} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) inv_loop1_loop.simps} @{text "\<or>"}\\
+                               &             & @{thm (rhs) inv_loop1_exit.simps} & (starting state)\\
+  @{thm (lhs) inv_loop0.simps} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) inv_loop0.simps}& (halting state)\smallskip\\
+   \hline
+  @{thm (lhs) inv_end1.simps} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) inv_end1.simps} & (starting state)\\
+  @{thm (lhs) inv_end0.simps} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) inv_end0.simps} & (halting state)\smallskip\\
+  \hline
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{center}
+  \caption{The invariants @{term inv_begin0},\ldots,@{term inv_begin4} are for the states of 
+  @{term tcopy_begin}. Below, the invariants only for the starting and halting states of
+  @{term tcopy_loop} and @{term tcopy_end} are shown. In each invariant, the parameter 
+  @{term n} stands for the number
+  of @{term Oc}s with which the Turing machine is started.}\label{invbegin}
+  \end{figure}
+
+  \begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}{rcl}
+  @{thm (lhs) inv_begin.simps} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & 
+  @{text "if"} @{thm (prem 1) inv_begin_print(1)} @{text then} @{thm (rhs) inv_begin_print(1)}\\
+  & & @{text else} @{text "if"} @{thm (prem 1) inv_begin_print(2)} @{text then} @{thm (rhs) inv_begin_print(2)} \\
+ & & @{text else} @{text "if"} @{thm (prem 1) inv_begin_print(3)} @{text then} @{thm (rhs) inv_begin_print(3)}\\
+  & & @{text else} @{text "if"} @{thm (prem 1) inv_begin_print(4)} @{text then} @{thm (rhs) inv_begin_print(4)}\\
+   & & @{text else} @{text "if"} @{thm (prem 1) inv_begin_print(5)} @{text then} @{thm (rhs) inv_begin_print(5)}\\
+  & & @{text else} @{thm (rhs) inv_begin_print(6)}
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  This invariant depends on @{term n} representing the number of
+  @{term Oc}s on the tape. It is not hard (26
+  lines of automated proof script) to show that for @{term "n >
+  (0::nat)"} this invariant is preserved under the computation rules
+  @{term step} and @{term steps}. This gives us partial correctness
+  for @{term "tcopy_begin"}. 
+
+  We next need to show that @{term "tcopy_begin"} terminates. For this
+  we introduce lexicographically ordered pairs @{term "(n, m)"}
+  derived from configurations @{text "(s, (l, r))"} whereby @{text n} is
+  the state @{text s}, but ordered according to how @{term tcopy_begin} executes
+  them, that is @{text "1 > 2 > 3 > 4 > 0"}; in order to have
+  a strictly decreasing measure, @{term m} takes the data on the tape into
+  account and is calculated according to the following measure function:
+
+  \begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}{rcl}
+  @{term measure_begin_step}@{text "(s, (l, r))"} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & 
+  @{text "if"} @{thm (prem 1) measure_begin_print(1)} @{text then} @{thm (rhs) measure_begin_print(1)}\\
+  & & @{text else} @{text "if"} @{thm (prem 1) measure_begin_print(2)} @{text then} 
+  @{text "("}@{thm (rhs) measure_begin_print(2)}@{text ")"} \\
+ & & @{text else} @{text "if"} @{thm (prem 1) measure_begin_print(3)} @{text then} @{thm (rhs) measure_begin_print(3)}\\
+  & & @{text else} @{thm (rhs) measure_begin_print(4)}\\
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{center}
+  
+  \noindent
+  With this in place, we can show that for every starting tape of the
+  form @{term "([], Oc \<up> n)"} with @{term "n > (0::nat)"}, the Turing
+  machine @{term "tcopy_begin"} will eventually halt (the measure
+  decreases in each step). Taking this and the partial correctness
+  proof together, we obtain the Hoare-triple shown on the left for @{term tcopy_begin}:
+   
+
+  \begin{center}
+  @{thm (concl) begin_correct}\hspace{6mm}
+  @{thm (concl) loop_correct}\hspace{6mm}
+  @{thm (concl) end_correct}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent 
+  where we assume @{text "0 < n"} (similar reasoning is needed for
+  the Hoare-triples for @{term tcopy_loop} and @{term tcopy_end}). Since the invariant of
+  the halting state of @{term tcopy_begin} implies the invariant of
+  the starting state of @{term tcopy_loop}, that is @{term "Turing_Hoare.assert_imp (inv_begin0 n)
+  (inv_loop1 n)"} holds, and also @{term "inv_loop0 n = inv_end1
+  n"}, we can derive the following Hoare-triple for the correctness 
+  of @{term tcopy}:
+
+  \begin{center}
+  @{thm tcopy_correct}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  That means if we start with a tape of the form @{term "([], <n::nat>)"} then 
+  @{term tcopy} will halt with the tape \mbox{@{term "([Bk], <(n::nat, n::nat)>)"}}, as desired.
+
+  Finally, we are in the position to prove the undecidability of the halting problem.
+  A program @{term p} started with a standard tape containing the (encoded) numbers
+  @{term ns} will \emph{halt} with a standard tape containing a single (encoded) 
+  number is defined as
+
+  \begin{center}
+  @{thm halts_def}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  This roughly means we considering only Turing machine programs
+  representing functions that take some numbers as input and produce a
+  single number as output. For undecidability, the property we are
+  proving is that there is no Turing machine that can decide in
+  general whether a Turing machine program halts (answer either @{text
+  0} for halting or @{text 1} for looping). Given our correctness
+  proofs for @{term dither} and @{term tcopy} shown above, this
+  non-existence is now relatively straightforward to establish. We first
+  assume there is a coding function, written @{term "code M"}, which
+  represents a Turing machine @{term "M"} as a natural number.  No
+  further assumptions are made about this coding function. Suppose a
+  Turing machine @{term H} exists such that if started with the
+  standard tape @{term "([Bk], <(code M, ns)>)"} returns @{text 0},
+  respectively @{text 1}, depending on whether @{text M} halts or not when
+  started with the input tape containing @{term "<ns>"}.  This
+  assumption is formalised as follows---for all @{term M} and all lists of
+  natural numbers @{term ns}:
+
+  \begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}{r}
+  @{thm (prem 2) uncomputable.h_case} implies
+  @{thm (concl) uncomputable.h_case}\\
+  
+  @{thm (prem 2) uncomputable.nh_case} implies
+  @{thm (concl) uncomputable.nh_case}
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  The contradiction can be derived using the following Turing machine
+
+  \begin{center}
+  @{thm tcontra_def}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  Suppose @{thm (prem 1) "tcontra_halt"} holds. Given the invariants @{text "P\<^isub>1"}\ldots@{text "P\<^isub>3"} 
+  shown on the 
+  left, we can derive the following Hoare-pair for @{term tcontra} on the right.
+
+  \begin{center}\small
+  \begin{tabular}{@ {}c@ {\hspace{-10mm}}c@ {}}
+  \begin{tabular}[t]{@ {}l@ {}}
+  @{term "P\<^isub>1 \<equiv> \<lambda>tp. tp = ([]::cell list, <code_tcontra>)"}\\
+  @{term "P\<^isub>2 \<equiv> \<lambda>tp. tp = ([Bk], <(code_tcontra, code_tcontra)>)"}\\
+  @{term "P\<^isub>3 \<equiv> \<lambda>tp. \<exists>k. tp = (Bk \<up> k, <0::nat>)"}
+  \end{tabular}
+  &
+  \begin{tabular}[b]{@ {}l@ {}}
+  \raisebox{-20mm}{$\inferrule*{
+    \inferrule*{@{term "{P\<^isub>1} tcopy {P\<^isub>2}"} \\ @{term "{P\<^isub>2} H {P\<^isub>3}"}}
+    {@{term "{P\<^isub>1} (tcopy |+| H) {P\<^isub>3}"}}
+    \\ @{term "{P\<^isub>3} dither \<up>"}
+   }
+   {@{term "{P\<^isub>1} tcontra \<up>"}}
+  $}
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  This Hoare-pair contradicts our assumption that @{term tcontra} started
+  with @{term "<(code tcontra)>"} halts.
+
+  Suppose @{thm (prem 1) "tcontra_unhalt"} holds. Again, given the invariants 
+  @{text "Q\<^isub>1"}\ldots@{text "Q\<^isub>3"}
+  shown on the 
+  left, we can derive the Hoare-triple for @{term tcontra} on the right.
+
+  \begin{center}\small
+  \begin{tabular}{@ {}c@ {\hspace{-18mm}}c@ {}}
+  \begin{tabular}[t]{@ {}l@ {}}
+  @{term "Q\<^isub>1 \<equiv> \<lambda>tp. tp = ([]::cell list, <code_tcontra>)"}\\
+  @{term "Q\<^isub>2 \<equiv> \<lambda>tp. tp = ([Bk], <(code_tcontra, code_tcontra)>)"}\\
+  @{term "Q\<^isub>3 \<equiv> \<lambda>tp. \<exists>k. tp = (Bk \<up> k, <1::nat>)"}
+  \end{tabular}
+  &
+  \begin{tabular}[t]{@ {}l@ {}}
+  \raisebox{-20mm}{$\inferrule*{
+    \inferrule*{@{term "{Q\<^isub>1} tcopy {Q\<^isub>2}"} \\ @{term "{Q\<^isub>2} H {Q\<^isub>3}"}}
+    {@{term "{Q\<^isub>1} (tcopy |+| H) {Q\<^isub>3}"}}
+    \\ @{term "{Q\<^isub>3} dither {Q\<^isub>3}"}
+   }
+   {@{term "{Q\<^isub>1} tcontra {Q\<^isub>3}"}}
+  $}
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  This time the Hoare-triple states that @{term tcontra} terminates 
+  with the ``output'' @{term "<(1::nat)>"}. In both cases we come
+  to a contradiction, which means we have to abandon our assumption 
+  that there exists a Turing machine @{term H} which can in general decide 
+  whether Turing machines terminate.
+*}
+
+
+section {* Abacus Machines *}
+
+text {*
+  \noindent
+  Boolos et al \cite{Boolos87} use abacus machines as a stepping stone
+  for making it less laborious to write Turing machine
+  programs. Abacus machines operate over a set of registers @{text "R\<^isub>0"},
+  @{text "R\<^isub>1"}, \ldots{}, @{text "R\<^isub>n"} each being able to hold an arbitrary large natural
+  number.  We use natural numbers to refer to registers; we also use a natural number
+  to represent a program counter and to represent jumping ``addresses'', for which we 
+  use the letter @{text l}. An abacus 
+  program is a list of \emph{instructions} defined by the datatype:
+
+  \begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}{rcl@ {\hspace{10mm}}l}
+  @{text "i"} & $::=$  & @{term "Inc R\<iota>"} & increment register @{text "R"} by one\\
+  & $\mid$ & @{term "Dec R\<iota> l"} & if content of @{text R} is non-zero, then decrement it by one\\
+  & & & otherwise jump to instruction @{text l}\\
+  & $\mid$ & @{term "Goto l"} & jump to instruction @{text l}
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  For example the program clearing the register @{text R} (that is setting
+  it to @{term "(0::nat)"}) can be defined as follows:
+
+  \begin{center}
+  @{thm clear.simps[where n="R\<iota>" and e="l", THEN eq_reflection]}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  Running such a program means we start with the first instruction
+  then execute one instructions after the other, unless there is a jump.  For
+  example the second instruction @{term "Goto 0"} above means
+  we jump back to the first instruction thereby closing the loop.  Like with our
+  Turing machines, we fetch instructions from an abacus program such
+  that a jump out of ``range'' behaves like a @{term "Nop"}-action. In
+  this way it is again easy to define a function @{term steps} that
+  executes @{term n} instructions of an abacus program. A \emph{configuration}
+  of an abacus machine is the current program counter together with a snapshot of 
+  all registers.
+  By convention
+  the value calculated by an abacus program is stored in the
+  last register (the one with the highest index in the program).
+  
+  The main point of abacus programs is to be able to translate them to 
+  Turing machine programs. Registers and their content are represented by
+  standard tapes (see definition shown in \eqref{standard}). Because of the jumps in abacus programs, it
+  is impossible to build Turing machine programs out of components 
+  using our @{text ";"}-operation shown in the previous section.
+  To overcome this difficulty, we calculate a \emph{layout} of an
+  abacus program as follows
+
+  \begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}[t]{@ {}l@ {\hspace{1mm}}c@ {\hspace{1mm}}l@ {}}
+  @{thm (lhs) layout(1)} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) layout(1)}\\
+  @{thm (lhs) layout(2)} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) layout(2)}\\
+  @{thm (lhs) layout(3)} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) layout(3)}\\
+  @{thm (lhs) layout(4)} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) layout(4)}\\
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  This gives us a list of natural numbers specifying how many states
+  are needed to translate each abacus instruction. This information
+  is needed in order to calculate the state where the Turing machine program
+  of an abacus instruction starts. This can be defined as
+
+  \begin{center}
+  @{thm address.simps[where x="n"]}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  where @{text p} is an abacus program and @{term "take n"} takes the first
+  @{text n} elements from a list.
+  
+  The @{text Goto}
+  instruction is easiest to translate requiring only one state, namely
+  the Turing machine program:
+
+  \begin{center}
+  @{text "translate_Goto l"} @{text "\<equiv>"} @{thm (rhs) tgoto.simps[where n="l"]}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  where @{term "l"} is the state in the Turing machine program 
+  to jump to. For translating the instruction @{term "Inc R\<iota>"}, 
+  one has to remember that the content of the registers are encoded
+  in the Turing machine as a standard tape. Therefore the translated Turing machine 
+  needs to first find the number corresponding to the content of register 
+  @{text "R"}. This needs a machine
+  with @{term "(2::nat) * R\<iota>"} states and can be constructed as follows: 
+
+  \begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}[t]{@ {}l@ {\hspace{1mm}}c@ {\hspace{1mm}}l@ {}}
+  @{thm (lhs) findnth.simps(1)} & @{text "\<equiv>"} & @{thm (rhs) findnth.simps(1)}\\
+  @{thm (lhs) findnth.simps(2)} & @{text "\<equiv>"}\\
+  \multicolumn{3}{@ {}l@ {}}{\hspace{6mm}@{thm (rhs) findnth.simps(2)}}\\
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  Then we need to increase the ``number'' on the tape by one,
+  and adjust the following ``registers''. For adjusting we only need to 
+  change the first @{term Oc} of each number to @{term Bk} and the last
+  one from @{term Bk} to @{term Oc}.
+  Finally, we need to transition the head of the
+  Turing machine back into the standard position. This requires a Turing machine
+  with 9 states (we omit the details). Similarly for the translation of @{term "Dec R\<iota> l"}, where the 
+  translated Turing machine needs to first check whether the content of the
+  corresponding register is @{text 0}. For this we have a Turing machine program
+  with @{text 16} states (again the details are omitted). 
+
+  Finally, having a Turing machine for each abacus instruction we need
+  to ``stitch'' the Turing machines together into one so that each
+  Turing machine component transitions to next one, just like in
+  the abacus programs. One last problem to overcome is that an abacus
+  program is assumed to calculate a value stored in the last
+  register (the one with the highest register). That means we have to append a Turing machine that
+  ``mops up'' the tape (cleaning all @{text Oc}s) except for the
+  @{term Oc}s of the last register represented on the tape. This needs
+  a Turing machine program with @{text "2 * R + 6"} states, assuming @{text R}
+  is the number of registers to be ``cleaned''.
+
+  While generating the Turing machine program for an abacus program is
+  not too difficult to formalise, the problem is that it contains
+  @{text Goto}s all over the place. The unfortunate result is that we
+  cannot use our Hoare-rules for reasoning about sequentially composed
+  programs (for this each component needs to be completely independent). Instead we
+  have to treat the translated Turing machine as one ``big block'' and 
+  prove as invariant that it performs
+  the same operations as the abacus program. For this we have to show
+  that for each configuration of an abacus machine the @{term
+  step}-function is simulated by zero or more steps in our translated
+  Turing machine. This leads to a rather large ``monolithic''
+  correctness proof (4600 loc and 380 sublemmas) that on the
+  conceptual level is difficult to break down into smaller components.
+  
+  %We were able to simplify the proof somewhat
+*}
+
+
+section {* Recursive Functions and a Universal Turing Machine *}
+
+text {*
+  The main point of recursive functions is that we can relatively 
+  easily construct a universal Turing machine via a universal 
+  function. This is different from Norrish \cite{Norrish11} who gives a universal 
+  function for the lambda-calculus, and also from Asperti and Ricciotti 
+  \cite{AspertiRicciotti12} who construct a universal Turing machine
+  directly, but for simulating Turing machines with a more restricted alphabet.
+  Unlike Norrish \cite{Norrish11}, we need to represent recursive functions
+  ``deeply'' because we want to translate them to abacus programs.
+  Thus \emph{recursive functions} are defined as the datatype
+
+  \begin{center}
+  \begin{tabular}{c@ {\hspace{4mm}}c}
+  \begin{tabular}{rcl@ {\hspace{4mm}}l}
+  @{term r} & @{text "::="} & @{term z} & (zero-function)\\
+            & @{text "|"}   & @{term s} & (successor-function)\\
+            & @{text "|"}   & @{term "id n m"} & (projection)\\
+  \end{tabular} &
+  \begin{tabular}{cl@ {\hspace{4mm}}l}
+  @{text "|"} & @{term "Cn n f fs"} & (composition)\\
+  @{text "|"} & @{term "Pr n f\<^isub>1 f\<^isub>2"} & (primitive recursion)\\
+  @{text "|"} & @{term "Mn n f"} & (minimisation)\\
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{tabular}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent 
+  where @{text n} indicates the function expects @{term n} arguments
+  (in \cite{Boolos87} both @{text z} and @{term s} expect one
+  argument), and @{text fs} stands for a list of recursive
+  functions. Since we know in each case the arity, say @{term l}, we
+  can define an evaluation function, called @{term rec_exec}, that takes a recursive
+  function @{text f} and a list @{term ns} of natural numbers of
+  length @{text l} as arguments. Since this evaluation function uses 
+  the minimisation operator
+  from HOL, this function might not terminate always. As a result we also
+  need to inductively characterise when @{term rec_exec} terminates.
+  We omit the definitions for
+  @{term "rec_exec f ns"} and @{term "terminate f ns"}. Because of 
+  space reasons, we also omit the definition of
+  translating recursive functions into abacus programs. We can prove,
+  however, the following theorem about the translation: If @{thm (prem
+  1) recursive_compile_to_tm_correct3[where recf="f" and args="ns"]} 
+  holds for the recursive function @{text f} and arguments @{term ns}, then the
+  following Hoare-triple holds
+
+  \begin{center}
+  @{thm (concl) recursive_compile_to_tm_correct3[where recf="f" and args="ns"]}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  for the Turing machine generated by @{term "translate f"}. This
+  means the translated Turing machine if started
+  with the standard tape @{term "([Bk, Bk], <ns::nat list>)"} will terminate
+  with the standard tape @{term "(Bk \<up> k, <(rec_exec f ns)::nat> @ Bk \<up> l)"} for some @{text k} and @{text l}.
+
+  Having recursive functions under our belt, we can construct a universal
+  function, written @{text UF}. This universal function acts like an interpreter for Turing machines.
+  It takes two arguments: one is the code of the Turing machine to be interpreted and the 
+  other is the ``packed version'' of the arguments of the Turing machine. 
+  We can then consider how this universal function is translated to a 
+  Turing machine and from this construct the universal Turing machine, 
+  written @{term UTM}. It is defined as 
+  the composition of the Turing machine that packages the arguments and
+  the translated recursive 
+  function @{text UF}:
+
+  \begin{center}
+  @{text "UTM \<equiv> arg_coding ; (translate UF)"}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  Suppose
+  a Turing program @{term p} is well-formed and  when started with the standard 
+  tape containing the arguments @{term args}, will produce a standard tape
+  with ``output'' @{term n}. This assumption can be written as the
+  Hoare-triple
+
+  \begin{center}
+  @{thm (prem 3) UTM_halt_lemma2}
+  \end{center}
+  
+  \noindent
+  where we require that the @{term args} stand for a non-empty list. Then the universal Turing
+  machine @{term UTM} started with the code of @{term p} and the arguments
+  @{term args}, calculates the same result, namely
+
+  \begin{center}
+  @{thm (concl) UTM_halt_lemma2} 
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  Similarly, if a Turing program @{term p} started with the 
+  standard tape containing @{text args} loops, which is represented
+  by the Hoare-pair
+
+  \begin{center}
+  @{thm (prem 2) UTM_unhalt_lemma2}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  then the universal Turing machine started with the code of @{term p} and the arguments
+  @{term args} will also loop
+
+  \begin{center}
+  @{thm (concl) UTM_unhalt_lemma2} 
+  \end{center}
+
+  %Analysing the universal Turing machine constructed in \cite{Boolos87} more carefully
+  %we can strengthen this result slightly by observing that @{text m} is at most
+  %2 in the output tape. This observation allows one to construct a universal Turing machine that works
+  %entirely on the left-tape by composing it with a machine that drags the tape
+  %two cells to the right. A corollary is that one-sided Turing machines (where the
+  %tape only extends to the right) are computationally as powerful as our two-sided 
+  %Turing machines. So our undecidability proof for the halting problem extends
+  %also to one-sided Turing machines, which is needed for example in order to
+  %formalise the undecidability of Wang's tiling problem \cite{Robinson71}.
+
+  While formalising the chapter in \cite{Boolos87} about universal
+  Turing machines, an unexpected outcome of our work is that we
+  identified an inconsistency in their use of a definition. This is
+  unexpected since \cite{Boolos87} is a classic textbook which has
+  undergone several editions (we used the fifth edition; the material 
+  containing the inconsistency was introduced in the fourth edition
+  of this book). The central
+  idea about Turing machines is that when started with standard tapes
+  they compute a partial arithmetic function.  The inconsistency arises
+  when they define the case when this function should \emph{not} return a
+  result. Boolos at al write in Chapter 3, Page 32:
+
+  \begin{quote}\it
+  ``If the function that is to be computed assigns no value to the arguments that 
+  are represented initially on the tape, then the machine either will never halt, 
+  \colorbox{mygrey}{or} will halt in some nonstandard configuration\ldots''
+  \end{quote}
+  
+  \noindent
+  Interestingly, they do not implement this definition when constructing
+  their universal Turing machine. In Chapter 8, on page 93, a recursive function 
+  @{term stdh} is defined as:
+	
+  \begin{equation}\label{stdh_def}
+  @{text "stdh(m, x, t) \<equiv> stat(conf(m, x, t)) + nstd(conf(m, x, t))"}
+  \end{equation}
+  
+  \noindent
+  where @{text "stat(conf(m, x, t))"} computes the current state of the
+  simulated Turing machine, and @{text "nstd(conf(m, x, t))"} returns @{text 1}
+  if the tape content is non-standard. If either one evaluates to
+  something that is not zero, then @{text "stdh(m, x, t)"} will be not zero, because of 
+  the $+$-operation. On the same page, a function @{text "halt(m, x)"} is defined 
+  in terms of @{text stdh} for computing the steps the Turing machine needs to
+  execute before it halts (in case it halts at all). According to this definition, the simulated
+  Turing machine will continue to run after entering the @{text 0}-state
+  with a non-standard tape. The consequence of this inconsistency is
+  that there exist Turing machines that given some arguments do not compute a value
+  according to Chapter 3, but return a proper result according to
+  the definition in Chapter 8. One such Turing machine is:
+
+  %This means that if you encode the plus function but only give one argument,
+  %then the TM will either loop {\bf or} stop with a non-standard tape
+
+  %But in the definition of the universal function the TMs will never stop
+  %with non-standard tapes. 
+
+  %SO the following TM calculates something according to def from chap 8,
+  %but not with chap 3. For example:
+  
+  \begin{center}
+  @{term "counter_example \<equiv> [(L, (0::nat)), (L, 2), (R, 2), (R, 0)]"}
+  \end{center}
+
+  \noindent
+  If started with standard tape @{term "([], [Oc])"}, it halts with the
+  non-standard tape @{term "([Oc, Bk], [])"} according to the definition in Chapter 3---so no
+  result is calculated; but with the standard tape @{term "([Bk], [Oc])"} according to the 
+  definition in Chapter 8. 
+  We solve this inconsistency in our formalisation by
+  setting up our definitions so that the @{text counter_example} Turing machine does not 
+  produce any result by looping forever fetching @{term Nop}s in state @{text 0}. 
+  This solution implements essentially the definition in Chapter 3; it  
+  differs from the definition in Chapter 8, where perplexingly the instruction 
+  from state @{text 1} is fetched.
+*}
+
+(*
+section {* XYZ *}
+
+text {*
+One of the main objectives of the paper is the construction and verification of Universal Turing machine (UTM). A UTM takes the code of any Turing machine $M$ and its arguments $a_1, a_2, \ldots, a_n$ as input and computes to the same effect as $M$ does on $a_1, a_2, \ldots, a_n$. That is to say:
+\begin{enumerate}
+    \item If $M$ terminates and gives a result on $a_1, a_2, \ldots, a_n$, so does $UTM$ on input
+        $
+        code(M), a_1, a_1, a_2, \ldots, a_n
+        $.
+    \item If $M$ loops forever on $a_1, a_2, \ldots, a_n$, then $UTM$ does the same on $code (M), a_1, a_1, a_2, \ldots, a_n$.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+The existence of UTM is the cornerstone of {\em Turing Thesis}, which says: any effectively computable function can be computed by a Turing Machine. The evaluation of Turing machine is obviously effective computable (otherwise, Turing machine is not an effect computation model). So, if the evaluation function of Turing machine can not be implemented by a Turing machine, the {\em Turing Thesis} would fail. Although people believe that UTM exists, few have gave one in close form and prove its correctness with the only exception of Asperti.
+
+
+The method to obtain Universal Turing machine (UTM), as hinted by Boolos's book, is first constructing a recursive function recF (named Universal Function), which serves as an interpreter for Turing machine program, and then the UTM is obtained by $translate(recF)$. However, since any particular recursive function only takes fixed number of arguments determined by its construction,  no matter how recF is constructed, it can only server as interpret for Turing machines which take the fixed number of arguments as input. Our solution is to precede the $translate(recF)$ with a Turing machine which compacts multiple arguments into one argument using Wang's coding. Now, $recF$ is defined as a function taking two arguments, where the first is the code of Turing machine to be interpreted and the second is the packed arguments.
+
+The construction of recF roughly follows the idea in the book. Since the book gives no correctness proof of the construction (not even an informal one), we have to formulate the correctness statements and as well as their formal proofs explicitly. As an unexpected outcome of this formulation, we identified one inconsistency in Boolos' book. Every Turing machine is supposed to compute an arithmetic function which is possibly partial. When the TM is started with an argument where the function is undefined, the definition on Chapter 3 (page 32) says:
+\begin{quote}
+(e) If the function that is to be computed assigns no value to the arguments that are
+represented initially on the tape, then the machine either will never halt, or will
+halt in some nonstandard configuration such as $B_n11111$ or $B11_n111$ or $B11111_n$.
+\end{quote}
+According to this definition, a TM can signify a non-result either by looping forever or get into state 0 with a nonstandard tape. However, when we were trying to formalize the universal function in Chapter 8, we found the definition given there is not in accordance. On page 93, an recursive function $stdh$ is defined as:
+	\begin{equation}\label{stdh_def}
+stdh(m, x, t) = stat(conf(m, x, t)) + nstd(conf(m, x, t))
+\end{equation}
+Where $ stat(conf(m, x, t)) $ computes the current state of the simulated Turing machine, and the $nstd(conf(m, x, t))$ returns $1$ if the tape content is nonstandard. If either one evaluates to nonzero, stdh(m, x, t) will be nonzero, because of the $+$ operation. One the same page, a function $halt(m, x)$ is defined to in terms of $stdh$ to computes the steps the Turing machine needs to execute before halt, which stipulates the TM halts when nstd(conf(m, x, t)) returns $0$. According to this definition, the simulated Turing machine will continue to run after getting into state $0$ with a nonstandard tape. The consequence of this inconsistency is that: there exists Turing machines which computes non-value according to Chapter 3, but returns a proper result according to Chapter 8. One such Truing machine is:
+    \begin{equation}\label{contrived_tm}
+        [(L, 0), (L, 2), (R, 2), (R, 0)]
+    \end{equation}
+Starting in a standard configuration (1, [], [Oc]), it goes through the following series of configurations leading to state 0:
+\[
+(1, [], [Oc]) \rightsquigarrow (L, 2) \rightsquigarrow  (2, [], [Bk, Oc]) \rightsquigarrow (R, 2)\rightsquigarrow (2, [Bk], [Oc]) \rightsquigarrow (R, 0)\rightsquigarrow  (0, [Bk, Oc], [])
+\]
+According to Chapter 3, this Turing machine halts and gives a non-result. According to Chapter 8, it will continue to fetch and execute the next instruction. The fetching function $actn$ and $newstat$ in \eqref{fetch-def} (taken from page 92) takes $q$ as current state and $r$ as the currently scanned cell.
+\begin{equation}\label{fetch-def}
+\begin{aligned}
+	actn(m, q, r )  &= ent(m, 4(q - 1)  + 2 \cdot scan(r )) \\
+newstat(m, q, r ) & = ent(m, (4(q - 1) + 2 \cdot scan(r )) + 1)
+\end{aligned}
+\end{equation}
+For our instance, $q=0$ and $r = 1$. Because $q - 1 = 0 - 1 = 1 - 1 = 0$, the instruction fetched by \eqref{fetch-def} at state $0$ will be the same as if the machine is at state $0$. So the Turing machine will go through the follow execution and halt with a standard tape:
+\[
+(0, [Bk, Oc], []) \rightsquigarrow (L, 0) \rightsquigarrow (0, [Bk], [Oc])
+\]
+In summary, according to Chapter 3, the Turing machine in \eqref{contrived_tm} computes non-result and according to Chapter 8, it computes an identify function. 
+*}
+*)
+
+(*
+section {* Wang Tiles\label{Wang} *}
+
+text {*
+  Used in texture mapings - graphics
+*}
+*)
+
+section {* Conclusion *}
+
+text {*
+  In previous works we were unable to formalise results about
+  computability because in Isabelle/HOL we cannot, for example,
+  represent the decidability of a predicate @{text P}, say, as the
+  formula @{term "P \<or> \<not>P"}. For reasoning about computability we need
+  to formalise a concrete model of computations. We could have
+  followed Norrish \cite{Norrish11} using the $\lambda$-calculus as
+  the starting point for formalising computability theory, but then we would have
+  to reimplement on the ML-level his infrastructure for rewriting
+  $\lambda$-terms modulo $\beta$-equality: HOL4 has a simplifer that
+  can rewrite terms modulo an arbitrary equivalence relation, which
+  Isabelle unfortunately does not yet have.  Even though, we would
+  still need to connect $\lambda$-terms somehow to Turing machines for
+  proofs that make essential use of them (for example the
+  undecidability proof for Wang's tiling problem \cite{Robinson71}).
+
+  We therefore have formalised Turing machines in the first place and the main
+  computability results from Chapters 3 to 8 in the textbook by Boolos
+  et al \cite{Boolos87}.  For this we did not need to implement
+  anything on the ML-level of Isabelle/HOL. While formalising the six chapters
+  of \cite{Boolos87} we have found an inconsistency in Boolos et al's 
+  definitions of what function a Turing machine calculates. In
+  Chapter 3 they use a definition that states a function is undefined
+  if the Turing machine loops \emph{or} halts with a non-standard
+  tape. Whereas in Chapter 8 about the universal Turing machine, the
+  Turing machines will \emph{not} halt unless the tape is in standard
+  form. Like Nipkow \cite{Nipkow98} observed with his formalisation
+  of a textbook, we found that Boolos et al are (almost)
+  right. We have not attempted to formalise everything precisely as
+  Boolos et al present it, but use definitions that make our
+  mechanised proofs manageable. For example our definition of the
+  halting state performing @{term Nop}-operations seems to be
+  non-standard, but very much suited to a formalisation in a theorem
+  prover where the @{term steps}-function needs to be total.
+
+   Norrish mentions that formalising Turing machines would be a
+  ``\emph{daunting prospect}'' \cite[Page 310]{Norrish11}. While
+  $\lambda$-terms indeed lead to some slick mechanised proofs, our
+  experience is that Turing machines are not too daunting if one is
+  only concerned with formalising the undecidability of the halting
+  problem for Turing machines.  As a point of comparison, the halting
+  problem took us around 1500 loc of Isar-proofs, which is just
+  one-and-a-half times of a mechanised proof pearl about the
+  Myhill-Nerode theorem. So our conclusion is that this part is not as
+  daunting as we estimated when reading the paper by Norrish
+  \cite{Norrish11}. The work involved with constructing a universal
+  Turing machine via recursive functions and abacus machines, we
+  agree, is not a project one wants to undertake too many times (our
+  formalisation of abacus machines and their correct translation is
+  approximately 4600 loc; recursive functions 2800 loc and the
+  universal Turing machine 10000 loc).
+  
+  Our work is also very much inspired by the formalisation of Turing
+  machines of Asperti and Ricciotti \cite{AspertiRicciotti12} in the
+  Matita theorem prover. It turns out that their notion of
+  realisability and our Hoare-triples are very similar, however we
+  differ in some basic definitions for Turing machines. Asperti and
+  Ricciotti are interested in providing a mechanised foundation for
+  complexity theory. They formalised a universal Turing machine
+  (which differs from ours by using a more general alphabet), but did
+  not describe an undecidability proof. Given their definitions and
+  infrastructure, we expect however this should not be too difficult 
+  for them.
+  
+  For us the most interesting aspects of our work are the correctness
+  proofs for Turing machines. Informal presentations of computability
+  theory often leave the constructions of particular Turing machines
+  as exercise to the reader, for example \cite{Boolos87}, deeming
+  it to be just a chore. However, as far as we are aware all informal
+  presentations leave out any arguments why these Turing machines
+  should be correct.  This means the reader is left
+  with the task of finding appropriate invariants and measures for
+  showing the correctness and termination of these Turing machines.
+  Whenever we can use Hoare-style reasoning, the invariants are
+  relatively straightforward and again as a point of comparison much smaller than for example the
+  invariants used by Myreen in a correctness proof of a garbage collector
+  written in machine code \cite[Page 76]{Myreen09}. However, the invariant 
+  needed for the abacus proof, where Hoare-style reasoning does not work, is
+  similar in size as the one by Myreen and finding a sufficiently
+  strong one took us, like Myreen, something on the magnitude of
+  weeks.
+
+  Our reasoning about the invariants is not much supported by the
+  automation beyond the standard automation tools available in
+  Isabelle/HOL.  There is however a tantalising connection between our
+  work and very recent work by Jensen et al \cite{Jensen13} on
+  verifying X86 assembly code that might change that. They observed a
+  similar phenomenon with assembly programs where Hoare-style
+  reasoning is sometimes possible, but sometimes it is not. In order
+  to ease their reasoning, they introduced a more primitive
+  specification logic, on which Hoare-rules can be provided for
+  special cases.  It remains to be seen whether their specification
+  logic for assembly code can make it easier to reason about our
+  Turing programs. That would be an attractive result, because Turing
+  machine programs are very much like assembly programs and it would
+  connect some very classic work on Turing machines to very
+  cutting-edge work on machine code verification. In order to try out
+  such ideas, our formalisation provides the ``playground''. The code
+  of our formalisation is available from the
+  Mercurial repository at \url{http://www.dcs.kcl.ac.uk/staff/urbanc/cgi-bin/repos.cgi/tm/}.
+  \medskip
+
+  \noindent
+  {\bf Acknowledgements:} We are very grateful for the extremely helpful
+  comments by the anonymous reviewers.
+*}
+
+
+
+(*<*)
+end
+end
+(*>*)
\ No newline at end of file
diff -r 00ac265b251b -r 02b6fab379ba Journal/document/IEEEtran.cls
--- /dev/null	Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
+++ b/Journal/document/IEEEtran.cls	Sat Jul 27 08:17:54 2013 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,4722 @@
+%%
+%% IEEEtran.cls 2007/03/05 version V1.7a
+%% 
+%% 
+%% This is the official IEEE LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of 
+%% Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Transactions journals and
+%% conferences.
+%% 
+%% Support sites:
+%% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/
+%% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/
+%% and
+%% http://www.ieee.org/
+%%
+%% Based on the original 1993 IEEEtran.cls, but with many bug fixes
+%% and enhancements (from both JVH and MDS) over the 1996/7 version.
+%%
+%%
+%% Contributors:
+%% Gerry Murray (1993), Silvano Balemi (1993),
+%% Jon Dixon (1996), Peter N"uchter (1996),
+%% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2007)
+%% 
+%% 
+%% Copyright (c) 1993-2000 by Gerry Murray, Silvano Balemi, 
+%%                         Jon Dixon, Peter N"uchter,
+%%                         Juergen von Hagen
+%%                         and
+%% Copyright (c) 2001-2007 by Michael Shell
+%%
+%% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.7): Michael Shell
+%%                                    See:
+%%                                    http://www.michaelshell.org/
+%%                                    for current contact information.
+%%
+%% Special thanks to Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau
+%% for allowing the inclusion of the \@ifmtarg command 
+%% from their ifmtarg LaTeX package. 
+%% 
+%%*************************************************************************
+%% Legal Notice:
+%% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or
+%% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
+%% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! 
+%% User assumes all risk.
+%% In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for
+%% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental,
+%% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse
+%% of any information contained here.
+%%
+%% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not
+%% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE.
+%%
+%% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL)
+%% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used,
+%% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included
+%% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released
+%% 2003/12/01 or later.
+%% Retain all contribution notices and credits.
+%% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including  **
+%% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. **
+%%
+%% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex,
+%%                    bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex
+%% 
+%% Major changes to the user interface should be indicated by an 
+%% increase in the version numbers. If a version is a beta, it will 
+%% be indicated with a BETA suffix, i.e., 1.4 BETA.
+%% Small changes can be indicated by appending letters to the version
+%% such as "IEEEtran_v14a.cls".
+%% In all cases, \Providesclass, any \typeout messages to the user,
+%% \IEEEtransversionmajor and \IEEEtransversionminor must reflect the
+%% correct version information.
+%% The changes should also be documented via source comments.
+%%*************************************************************************
+%%
+%
+% Available class options 
+% e.g., \documentclass[10pt,conference]{IEEEtran} 
+% 
+%             *** choose only one from each category ***
+%
+% 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt
+%    Sets normal font size. The default is 10pt.
+% 
+% conference, journal, technote, peerreview, peerreviewca
+%    determines format mode - conference papers, journal papers,
+%    correspondence papers (technotes), or peer review papers. The user
+%    should also select 9pt when using technote. peerreview is like
+%    journal mode, but provides for a single-column "cover" title page for
+%    anonymous peer review. The paper title (without the author names) is
+%    repeated at the top of the page after the cover page. For peer review
+%    papers, the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle command must be executed (will
+%    automatically be ignored for non-peerreview modes) at the place the
+%    cover page is to end, usually just after the abstract (keywords are
+%    not normally used with peer review papers). peerreviewca is like
+%    peerreview, but allows the author names to be entered and formatted
+%    as with conference mode so that author affiliation and contact
+%    information can be easily seen on the cover page.
+%    The default is journal.
+%
+% draft, draftcls, draftclsnofoot, final
+%    determines if paper is formatted as a widely spaced draft (for
+%    handwritten editor comments) or as a properly typeset final version.
+%    draftcls restricts draft mode to the class file while all other LaTeX
+%    packages (i.e., \usepackage{graphicx}) will behave as final - allows
+%    for a draft paper with visible figures, etc. draftclsnofoot is like
+%    draftcls, but does not display the date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot
+%    of the pages. If using one of the draft modes, the user will probably
+%    also want to select onecolumn.
+%    The default is final.
+%
+% letterpaper, a4paper
+%    determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in or 210mm X 297mm. CHANGING THE PAPER
+%    SIZE WILL NOT ALTER THE TYPESETTING OF THE DOCUMENT - ONLY THE MARGINS
+%    WILL BE AFFECTED. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will
+%    have reduced side margins (A4 is narrower than US letter) and a longer
+%    bottom margin (A4 is longer than US letter). For both cases, the top
+%    margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered. 
+%    For final submission to IEEE, authors should use US letter (8.5 X 11in)
+%    paper. Note that authors should ensure that all post-processing 
+%    (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper specificiation as the .tex document.
+%    Problems here are by far the number one reason for incorrect margins.
+%    IEEEtran will automatically set the default paper size under pdflatex 
+%    (without requiring a change to pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more
+%    important to dvips users. Fix config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for
+%    dvips, or use the dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. See the
+%    testflow documentation
+%    http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/testflow
+%    for more details on dvips paper size configuration.
+%    The default is letterpaper.
+%
+% oneside, twoside
+%    determines if layout follows single sided or two sided (duplex)
+%    printing. The only notable change is with the headings at the top of
+%    the pages.
+%    The default is oneside.
+%
+% onecolumn, twocolumn
+%    determines if text is organized into one or two columns per page. One
+%    column mode is usually used only with draft papers.
+%    The default is twocolumn.
+%
+% compsoc
+%    Use the format of the IEEE Computer Society.
+%
+% compsocconf
+% 	Use the	format of IEEE Computer Society conferencs (CPS)
+%
+% romanappendices
+%    Use the "Appendix I" convention when numbering appendices. IEEEtran.cls
+%    now defaults to Alpha "Appendix A" convention - the opposite of what
+%    v1.6b and earlier did.
+%
+% captionsoff
+%    disables the display of the figure/table captions. Some IEEE journals
+%    request that captions be removed and figures/tables be put on pages
+%    of their own at the end of an initial paper submission. The endfloat
+%    package can be used with this class option to achieve this format.
+%
+% nofonttune
+%    turns off tuning of the font interword spacing. Maybe useful to those
+%    not using the standard Times fonts or for those who have already "tuned"
+%    their fonts.
+%    The default is to enable IEEEtran to tune font parameters.
+%
+%
+%----------
+% Available CLASSINPUTs provided (all are macros unless otherwise noted):
+% \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch
+% \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin
+% \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin
+% \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin
+% \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin
+%
+% Available CLASSINFOs provided:
+% \ifCLASSINFOpdf                       (TeX if conditional)
+% \CLASSINFOpaperwidth                  (macro)
+% \CLASSINFOpaperheight                 (macro)
+% \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip      (length)
+% \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip (length)
+%
+% Available CLASSOPTIONs provided:
+% all class option flags (TeX if conditionals) unless otherwise noted,
+% e.g., \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
+% point size options provided as a single macro:
+% \CLASSOPTIONpt
+% which will be defined as 9, 10, 11, or 12 depending on the document's
+% normalsize point size.
+% also, class option peerreviewca implies the use of class option peerreview
+% and classoption draft implies the use of class option draftcls
+
+
+
+
+
+\ProvidesClass{IEEEtran}[2007/03/05 V1.7a by Michael Shell]
+\typeout{-- See the "IEEEtran_HOWTO" manual for usage information.}
+\typeout{-- http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/}
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+
+% IEEEtran.cls version numbers, provided as of V1.3
+% These values serve as a way a .tex file can
+% determine if the new features are provided.
+% The version number of this IEEEtrans.cls can be obtained from 
+% these values. i.e., V1.4
+% KEEP THESE AS INTEGERS! i.e., NO {4a} or anything like that-
+% (no need to enumerate "a" minor changes here)
+\def\IEEEtransversionmajor{1}
+\def\IEEEtransversionminor{7}
+
+% These do nothing, but provide them like in article.cls
+\newif\if@restonecol
+\newif\if@titlepage
+
+
+% class option conditionals
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONonecolumn       \CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn       \CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue
+
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONoneside         \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside         \CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse
+
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONfinal           \CLASSOPTIONfinaltrue
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraft           \CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls        \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot  \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse
+
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview      \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca    \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
+
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal         \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONconference      \CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote        \CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse
+
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune      \CLASSOPTIONnofonttunefalse
+
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff     \CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofffalse
+
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc         \CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse
+
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsocconf     \CLASSOPTIONcompsocconffalse
+
+\newif\ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices \CLASSOPTIONromanappendicesfalse
+
+
+% class info conditionals
+
+% indicates if pdf (via pdflatex) output
+\newif\ifCLASSINFOpdf               \CLASSINFOpdffalse
+
+
+% V1.6b internal flag to show if using a4paper
+\newif\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper       \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
+
+
+
+% IEEEtran class scratch pad registers
+% dimen
+\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
+\newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB
+% count
+\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA
+\newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB
+% token list
+\newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA
+
+% we use \CLASSOPTIONpt so that we can ID the point size (even for 9pt docs)
+% as well as LaTeX's \@ptsize to retain some compatability with some
+% external packages
+\def\@ptsize{0}
+% LaTeX does not support 9pt, so we set \@ptsize to 0 - same as that of 10pt
+\DeclareOption{9pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{9}\def\@ptsize{0}}
+\DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{10}\def\@ptsize{0}}
+\DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{11}\def\@ptsize{1}}
+\DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{12}\def\@ptsize{2}}
+
+
+
+\DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{11in}%
+                            \setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}%
+                            \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse
+                            \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{letter}%
+                            \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{8.5in}%
+                            \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{11in}}
+
+
+\DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}%
+                        \setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}%
+                        \@IEEEusingAfourpapertrue
+                        \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{a4}%
+                        \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{210mm}%
+                        \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{297mm}}
+
+\DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse
+                        \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue\CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse}
+\DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue
+                        \CLASSOPTIONtwosidetrue\CLASSOPTIONonesidefalse}
+
+\DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumnfalse}
+\DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse}
+
+% If the user selects draft, then this class AND any packages
+% will go into draft mode.
+\DeclareOption{draft}{\CLASSOPTIONdrafttrue\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
+                      \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} 
+% draftcls is for a draft mode which will not affect any packages
+% used by the document.
+\DeclareOption{draftcls}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
+                         \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} 
+% draftclsnofoot is like draftcls, but without the footer.
+\DeclareOption{draftclsnofoot}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue
+                               \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoottrue} 
+\DeclareOption{final}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse
+                      \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse}
+
+\DeclareOption{journal}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
+                        \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
+
+\DeclareOption{conference}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
+                           \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencetrue\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
+
+\DeclareOption{technote}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
+                         \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotetrue}
+
+\DeclareOption{peerreview}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse
+                           \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
+
+\DeclareOption{peerreviewca}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcatrue
+                             \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse}
+
+\DeclareOption{nofonttune}{\CLASSOPTIONnofonttunetrue}
+
+\DeclareOption{captionsoff}{\CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofftrue}
+
+\DeclareOption{compsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcompsoctrue}
+
+\DeclareOption{compsocconf}{\CLASSOPTIONcompsocconftrue}
+
+\DeclareOption{romanappendices}{\CLASSOPTIONromanappendicestrue}
+
+
+% default to US letter paper, 10pt, twocolumn, one sided, final, journal
+\ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twocolumn,oneside,final,journal}
+% overrride these defaults per user requests
+\ProcessOptions
+
+
+
+% Computer Society conditional execution command
+\long\def\@IEEEcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\relax#1\relax\fi\relax}
+% inverse
+\long\def\@IEEEnotcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\relax#1\relax\fi\relax}
+% compsoc conference
+\long\def\@IEEEcompsocconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsocconf\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax}
+% compsoc not conference
+\long\def\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax}
+
+
+% IEEE uses Times Roman font, so we'll default to Times.
+% These three commands make up the entire times.sty package.
+\renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv}
+\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm}
+\renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr}
+
+\@IEEEcompsoconly{\typeout{-- Using IEEE Computer Society mode.}}
+
+% V1.7 compsoc nonconference papers, use Palatino/Palladio as the main text font,
+% not Times Roman.
+\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ppl}}
+
+% enable Times/Palatino main text font
+\normalfont\selectfont
+
+
+
+
+
+% V1.7 conference notice message hook
+\def\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference{\typeout{}%
+\typeout{** Conference Paper **}%
+\typeout{Before submitting the final camera ready copy, remember to:}%
+\typeout{}%
+\typeout{ 1. Manually equalize the lengths of two columns on the last page}%
+\typeout{ of your paper;}%
+\typeout{}%
+\typeout{ 2. Ensure that any PostScript and/or PDF output post-processing}%
+\typeout{ uses only Type 1 fonts and that every step in the generation}%
+\typeout{ process uses the appropriate paper size.}%
+\typeout{}}
+
+
+% we can send console reminder messages to the user here
+\AtEndDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference\fi}
+
+
+% warn about the use of single column other than for draft mode
+\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn\else%
+  \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\else%
+   \typeout{** ATTENTION: Single column mode is not typically used with IEEE publications.}%
+  \fi%
+\fi
+
+
+% V1.7 improved paper size setting code.
+% Set pdfpage and dvips paper sizes. Conditional tests are similar to that
+% of ifpdf.sty. Retain within {} to ensure tested macros are never altered,
+% even if only effect is to set them to \relax.
+% if \pdfoutput is undefined or equal to relax, output a dvips special
+{\@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}}{%
+% pdfoutput is defined and not equal to \relax
+% check for pdfpageheight existence just in case someone sets pdfoutput
+% under non-pdflatex. If exists, set them regardless of value of \pdfoutput.
+\@ifundefined{pdfpageheight}{\relax}{\global\pdfpagewidth\paperwidth
+\global\pdfpageheight\paperheight}%
+% if using \pdfoutput=0 under pdflatex, send dvips papersize special
+\ifcase\pdfoutput
+\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}%
+\else
+% we are using pdf output, set CLASSINFOpdf flag
+\global\CLASSINFOpdftrue
+\fi}}
+
+% let the user know the selected papersize
+\typeout{-- Using \CLASSINFOpaperwidth\space x \CLASSINFOpaperheight\space
+(\CLASSOPTIONpaper)\space paper.}
+
+\ifCLASSINFOpdf
+\typeout{-- Using PDF output.}
+\else
+\typeout{-- Using DVI output.}
+\fi
+
+
+% The idea hinted here is for LaTeX to generate markleft{} and markright{}
+% automatically for you after you enter \author{}, \journal{},
+% \journaldate{}, journalvol{}, \journalnum{}, etc.
+% However, there may be some backward compatibility issues here as
+% well as some special applications for IEEEtran.cls and special issues
+% that may require the flexible \markleft{}, \markright{} and/or \markboth{}.
+% We'll leave this as an open future suggestion.
+%\newcommand{\journal}[1]{\def\@journal{#1}}
+%\def\@journal{}
+
+
+
+% pointsize values
+% used with ifx to determine the document's normal size
+\def\@IEEEptsizenine{9}
+\def\@IEEEptsizeten{10}
+\def\@IEEEptsizeeleven{11}
+\def\@IEEEptsizetwelve{12}
+
+
+
+% FONT DEFINITIONS (No sizexx.clo file needed) 
+% V1.6 revised font sizes, displayskip values and
+%      revised normalsize baselineskip to reduce underfull vbox problems
+%      on the 58pc = 696pt = 9.5in text height we want
+%      normalsize     #lines/column  baselineskip (aka leading)
+%             9pt     63             11.0476pt (truncated down)
+%            10pt     58             12pt      (exact)
+%            11pt     52             13.3846pt (truncated down)
+%            12pt     50             13.92pt   (exact)
+%
+
+% we need to store the nominal baselineskip for the given font size
+% in case baselinestretch ever changes.
+% this is a dimen, so it will not hold stretch or shrink
+\newdimen\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
+\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\baselineskip
+
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
+\typeout{-- This is a 9 point document.}
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}}%
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt}%
+\normalsize
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt%
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus3pt%
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt
+\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5}{10pt}}
+\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}}
+\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}}
+\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}}
+% sublargesize is the same as large - 10pt
+\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10}{12pt}}
+\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10}{12pt}}
+\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12}{14pt}}
+\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14}{17pt}}
+\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17}{20pt}}
+\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20}{24pt}}
+\fi
+
+
+% Check if we have selected 10 points
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten
+\typeout{-- This is a 10 point document.}
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10}{12.00pt}}%
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{12pt}%
+\normalsize
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt%
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus4pt%
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt
+\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9}{10pt}}
+\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}}
+\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}}
+\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}}
+% sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11pt
+\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11}{13.4pt}}
+\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}}
+\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}}
+\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}}
+\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}}
+\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
+\fi
+
+
+% Check if we have selected 11 points
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven
+\typeout{-- This is an 11 point document.}
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}}%
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt}%
+\normalsize
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt%
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus5pt%
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt
+\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}}
+\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}}
+\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}}
+\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}}
+% sublargesize is the same as large - 12pt
+\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12}{14pt}}
+\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}}
+\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}}
+\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}}
+\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}}
+\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
+\fi
+
+
+% Check if we have selected 12 points
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve
+\typeout{-- This is a 12 point document.}
+\def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}}%
+\setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt}%
+\normalsize
+\abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt%
+\belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip%
+\abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus6pt%
+\belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt
+\def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}}
+\def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}}
+\def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}}
+\def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}}
+% sublargesize is the same as large - 14pt
+\def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14}{17pt}}
+\def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14}{17pt}}
+\def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17}{20pt}}
+\def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20}{24pt}}
+\def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22}{26pt}}
+\def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}}
+\fi
+
+
+% V1.6 The Computer Modern Fonts will issue a substitution warning for
+% 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead) increase the substitution
+% tolerance to turn off this warning
+\def\fontsubfuzz{.9pt}
+% However, the default (and correct) Times font will scale exactly as needed.
+
+
+% warn the user in case they forget to use the 9pt option with
+% technote
+\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%
+ \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\else%
+  \typeout{** ATTENTION: Technotes are normally 9pt documents.}%
+ \fi%
+\fi
+
+
+% V1.7
+% Improved \textunderscore to provide a much better fake _ when used with
+% OT1 encoding. Under OT1, detect use of pcr or cmtt \ttfamily and use
+% available true _ glyph for those two typewriter fonts.
+\def\@IEEEstringptm{ptm} % Times Roman family
+\def\@IEEEstringppl{ppl} % Palatino Roman family
+\def\@IEEEstringphv{phv} % Helvetica Sans Serif family
+\def\@IEEEstringpcr{pcr} % Courier typewriter family
+\def\@IEEEstringcmtt{cmtt} % Computer Modern typewriter family
+\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textunderscore}{\leavevmode
+\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringpcr\string_\else
+\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringcmtt\string_\else
+\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringptm\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else
+\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringppl\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else
+\ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringphv\kern -0.03em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.62em\@height 0.52pt\kern -0.33ex}\kern -0.03em\else
+\kern 0.09em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.6em\@height 0.44pt\kern -0.63pt\kern -0.42ex}\kern 0.09em\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\relax}
+
+
+
+
+% set the default \baselinestretch
+\def\baselinestretch{1}
+\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
+  \def\baselinestretch{1.5}% default baselinestretch for draft modes
+\fi 
+
+
+% process CLASSINPUT baselinestretch
+\ifx\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch\@IEEEundefined
+\else
+  \edef\baselinestretch{\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch} % user CLASSINPUT override
+  \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding \string\baselinestretch\space to
+           \baselinestretch\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
+\fi
+
+\normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect
+
+
+
+
+% store the normalsize baselineskip
+\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip
+\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip=\baselineskip\relax
+% and the normalsize unity (baselinestretch=1) baselineskip
+% we could save a register by giving the user access to
+% \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip. However, let's protect
+% its read only internal status
+\newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
+\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\relax
+% store the nominal value of jot
+\newdimen\IEEEnormaljot
+\IEEEnormaljot=0.25\baselineskip\relax
+
+% set \jot
+\jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax
+
+
+
+
+% V1.6, we are now going to fine tune the interword spacing
+% The default interword glue for Times under TeX appears to use a
+% nominal interword spacing of 25% (relative to the font size, i.e., 1em)
+% a maximum of 40% and a minimum of 19%.
+% For example, 10pt text uses an interword glue of:
+% 
+% 2.5pt plus 1.49998pt minus 0.59998pt
+% 
+% However, IEEE allows for a more generous range which reduces the need
+% for hyphenation, especially for two column text. Furthermore, IEEE
+% tends to use a little bit more nominal space between the words.
+% IEEE's interword spacing percentages appear to be:
+% 35% nominal
+% 23% minimum
+% 50% maximum
+% (They may even be using a tad more for the largest fonts such as 24pt.)
+% 
+% for bold text, IEEE increases the spacing a little more:
+% 37.5% nominal
+% 23% minimum
+% 55% maximum
+
+% here are the interword spacing ratios we'll use
+% for medium (normal weight)
+\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.35}
+\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.23}
+\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.50}
+
+% for bold
+\def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.375}
+\def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.23}
+\def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.55}
+
+
+% command to revise the interword spacing for the current font under TeX:
+% \fontdimen2 = nominal interword space
+% \fontdimen3 = interword stretch
+% \fontdimen4 = interword shrink
+% since all changes to the \fontdimen are global, we can enclose these commands
+% in braces to confine any font attribute or length changes
+\def\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens#1#2#3{{%
+\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\f@size pt}% grab the font size in pt, could use 1em instead.
+\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
+\fontdimen2\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
+\fontdimen3\font=-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax
+\setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
+\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}%
+\fontdimen4\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax}}
+
+% revise the interword spacing for each font weight
+\def\@@IEEEsetfontdimens{{%
+\mdseries
+\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM}%
+\bfseries
+\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB}%
+}}
+
+% revise the interword spacing for each font shape
+% \slshape is not often used for IEEE work and is not altered here. The \scshape caps are
+% already a tad too large in the free LaTeX fonts (as compared to what IEEE uses) so we
+% won't alter these either.
+\def\@IEEEsetfontdimens{{%
+\normalfont
+\@@IEEEsetfontdimens
+\normalfont\itshape
+\@@IEEEsetfontdimens
+}}
+
+% command to revise the interword spacing for each font size (and shape
+% and weight). Only the \rmfamily is done here as \ttfamily uses a 
+% fixed spacing and \sffamily is not used as the main text of IEEE papers.
+\def\@IEEEtunefonts{{\selectfont\rmfamily
+\tiny\@IEEEsetfontdimens
+\scriptsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
+\footnotesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
+\small\@IEEEsetfontdimens
+\normalsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
+\sublargesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens
+\large\@IEEEsetfontdimens
+\LARGE\@IEEEsetfontdimens
+\huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens
+\Huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens}}
+
+% if the nofonttune class option is not given, revise the interword spacing
+% now - in case IEEEtran makes any default length measurements, and make
+% sure all the default fonts are loaded
+\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else
+\@IEEEtunefonts
+\fi
+
+% and again at the start of the document in case the user loaded different fonts
+\AtBeginDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else\@IEEEtunefonts\fi}
+
+
+
+% V1.6 
+% LaTeX is a little to quick to use hyphenations
+% So, we increase the penalty for their use and raise
+% the badness level that triggers an underfull hbox
+% warning. The author may still have to tweak things,
+% but the appearance will be much better "right out
+% of the box" than that under V1.5 and prior.
+% TeX default is 50
+\hyphenpenalty=750
+% If we didn't adjust the interword spacing, 2200 might be better.
+% The TeX default is 1000
+\hbadness=1350
+% IEEE does not use extra spacing after punctuation
+\frenchspacing
+
+% V1.7 increase this a tad to discourage equation breaks
+\binoppenalty=1000 % default 700
+\relpenalty=800     % default 500
+
+
+% margin note stuff
+\marginparsep      10pt
+\marginparwidth    20pt
+\marginparpush     25pt
+
+
+% if things get too close, go ahead and let them touch
+\lineskip            0pt
+\normallineskip      0pt
+\lineskiplimit       0pt
+\normallineskiplimit 0pt
+
+% The distance from the lower edge of the text body to the
+% footline
+\footskip 0.4in
+
+% normally zero, should be relative to font height.
+% put in a little rubber to help stop some bad breaks (underfull vboxes)
+\parskip 0ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex
+
+\parindent    1.0em
+
+\topmargin    -49.0pt
+\headheight   12pt
+\headsep      0.25in
+
+% use the normal font baselineskip
+% so that \topskip is unaffected by changes in \baselinestretch
+\topskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
+\textheight       58pc  % 9.63in, 696pt
+% Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
+% The normal baselineskip for each document point size is used 
+% to determine these values.
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=63\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi      % 63 lines/page
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi       % 58 lines/page
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=52\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 52 lines/page
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 50 lines/page
+
+
+\columnsep         1pc
+\textwidth        43pc   % 2 x 21pc + 1pc = 43pc
+ 
+
+% the default side margins are equal
+\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper 
+\oddsidemargin        19.05mm
+\evensidemargin       19.05mm
+\else
+\oddsidemargin        0.680in
+\evensidemargin       0.680in
+\fi
+% compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset
+\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+\addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}
+
+
+
+% adjust margins for conference mode
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
+ \topmargin        -0.25in
+ % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers
+ \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}
+ \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}
+ \textheight        9.25in % The standard for conferences (668.4975pt)
+ % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
+ \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=61\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi      % 61 lines/page
+ \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=56\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi       % 56 lines/page
+ \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 50 lines/page
+ \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 48 lines/page
+\fi
+
+
+% compsoc conference
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsocconf
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
+ % compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep
+ \columnsep 0.25in
+ % compsoc conferences want 1in top margin, 1.125in bottom margin
+ \topmargin        0in
+ %\addtolength{\topmargin}{-6pt}% we tweak this a tad to better comply with top of line stuff
+ % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers
+ \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}
+ \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}
+ \textheight        9.0in % (641.39625pt)
+
+ % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page.
+ \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi      % 58 lines/page
+ \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=54\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi       % 54 lines/page
+ \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 48 lines/page
+ \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=46\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi    % 46 lines/page 
+ \textwidth 7in
+
+ 
+ %adjust text h/w for A4 paper
+ \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper 
+  \textheight 9.69in
+  \textwidth 6.77in 
+ \fi
+ 
+ % the default side margins are equal
+ \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper 
+  \oddsidemargin        19.05mm
+  \evensidemargin       19.05mm
+ \else
+  \oddsidemargin        0.75in
+  \evensidemargin       0.75in
+ \fi
+ % compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset
+ \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+ \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}
+\fi\fi
+
+
+
+% draft mode settings override that of all other modes
+% provides a nice 1in margin all around the paper and extra
+% space between the lines for editor's comments
+\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls 
+  % want 1in from top of paper to text
+  \setlength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}%
+  \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}%
+  % we want 1in side margins regardless of paper type
+  \oddsidemargin      0in
+  \evensidemargin     0in
+  % set the text width
+  \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}%
+  \addtolength{\textwidth}{-2.0in}%
+  \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}%
+  \addtolength{\textheight}{-2.0in}%
+  % digitize textheight to be an integer number of lines.
+  % this may cause the bottom margin to be off a tad
+  \addtolength{\textheight}{-1\topskip}%
+  \divide\textheight  by \baselineskip%
+  \multiply\textheight  by \baselineskip%
+  \addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}%
+\fi
+
+
+
+% process CLASSINPUT inner/outer margin
+% if inner margin defined, but outer margin not, set outer to inner.
+\ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
+\else
+  \ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
+    \edef\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
+  \fi
+\fi
+
+\ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
+\else
+  % if outer margin defined, but inner margin not, set inner to outer.
+  \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined
+    \edef\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
+  \fi
+  \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
+  \ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside
+    \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
+  \else
+    \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
+  \fi
+  \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in}
+  \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in}
+  \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}
+  \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin}
+  \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin}
+  \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding inner side margin to \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\space and 
+           outer side margin to \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
+\fi
+
+
+
+% process CLASSINPUT top/bottom text margin
+% if toptext margin defined, but bottomtext margin not, set bottomtext to toptext margin
+\ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined
+\else
+  \ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined
+    \edef\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
+  \fi
+\fi
+
+\ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined
+\else
+  % if bottomtext margin defined, but toptext margin not, set toptext to bottomtext margin
+  \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined
+    \edef\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}
+  \fi
+  \setlength{\topmargin}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
+  \addtolength{\topmargin}{-1in}
+  \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}
+  \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}
+  \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}
+  \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin}
+  \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin}
+  % in the default format we use the normal baselineskip as topskip
+  % we only need 0.7 of this to clear typical top text and we need
+  % an extra 0.3 spacing at the bottom for descenders. This will
+  % correct for both.
+  \addtolength{\topmargin}{-0.3\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}
+  \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding top text margin to \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\space and 
+           bottom text margin to \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.}
+\fi
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+% LIST SPACING CONTROLS
+
+% Controls the amount of EXTRA spacing
+% above and below \trivlist 
+% Both \list and IED lists override this.
+% However, \trivlist will use this as will most
+% things built from \trivlist like the \center
+% environment.
+\topsep           0.5\baselineskip
+
+% Controls the additional spacing around lists preceded
+% or followed by blank lines. IEEE does not increase
+% spacing before or after paragraphs so it is set to zero.
+% \z@ is the same as zero, but faster.
+\partopsep          \z@
+
+% Controls the spacing between paragraphs in lists. 
+% IEEE does not increase spacing before or after paragraphs
+% so this is also zero. 
+% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to
+% this value DO affect lists (but not IED lists).
+\parsep             \z@
+
+% Controls the extra spacing between list items. 
+% IEEE does not put extra spacing between items.
+% With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to this value DO affect
+% lists (but not IED lists).
+\itemsep            \z@
+
+% \itemindent is the amount to indent the FIRST line of a list
+% item. It is auto set to zero within the \list environment. To alter
+% it, you have to do so when you call the \list.
+% However, IEEE uses this for the theorem environment
+% There is an alternative value for this near \leftmargini below
+\itemindent         -1em
+
+% \leftmargin, the spacing from the left margin of the main text to
+% the left of the main body of a list item is set by \list.
+% Hence this statement does nothing for lists.
+% But, quote and verse do use it for indention.
+\leftmargin         2em
+
+% we retain this stuff from the older IEEEtran.cls so that \list
+% will work the same way as before. However, itemize, enumerate and
+% description (IED) could care less about what these are as they
+% all are overridden.
+\leftmargini        2em
+%\itemindent         2em  % Alternative values: sometimes used.
+%\leftmargini        0em
+\leftmarginii       1em
+\leftmarginiii    1.5em
+\leftmarginiv     1.5em
+\leftmarginv      1.0em
+\leftmarginvi     1.0em
+\labelsep         0.5em 
+\labelwidth         \z@
+
+
+% The old IEEEtran.cls behavior of \list is retained.
+% However, the new V1.3 IED list environments override all the
+% @list stuff (\@listX is called within \list for the
+% appropriate level just before the user's list_decl is called). 
+% \topsep is now 2pt as IEEE puts a little extra space around
+% lists - used by those non-IED macros that depend on \list.
+% Note that \parsep and \itemsep are not redefined as in 
+% the sizexx.clo \@listX (which article.cls uses) so global changes
+% of these values DO affect \list
+% 
+\def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \topsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt}
+\let\@listI\@listi
+\def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\labelwidth\leftmarginii%
+    \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
+\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\labelwidth\leftmarginiii%
+    \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
+\def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\labelwidth\leftmarginiv%
+    \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
+\def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\labelwidth\leftmarginv%
+    \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
+\def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\labelwidth\leftmarginvi%
+    \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt}
+
+
+% IEEE uses 5) not 5.
+\def\labelenumi{\theenumi)}     \def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}}
+
+% IEEE uses a) not (a)
+\def\labelenumii{\theenumii)}  \def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}}
+
+% IEEE uses iii) not iii.
+\def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii)} \def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}}
+
+% IEEE uses A) not A.
+\def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv)}   \def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}}
+
+% exactly the same as in article.cls
+\def\p@enumii{\theenumi}
+\def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)}
+\def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}
+
+% itemized list label styles
+\def\labelitemi{$\scriptstyle\bullet$}
+\def\labelitemii{\textbf{--}}
+\def\labelitemiii{$\ast$}
+\def\labelitemiv{$\cdot$}
+
+
+
+% **** V1.3 ENHANCEMENTS ****
+% Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls
+% ***************************
+% 
+% 
+% IEEE seems to use at least two different values by
+% which ITEMIZED list labels are indented to the right
+% For The Journal of Lightwave Technology (JLT) and The Journal
+% on Selected Areas in Communications (JSAC), they tend to use
+% an indention equal to \parindent. For Transactions on Communications
+% they tend to indent ITEMIZED lists a little more--- 1.3\parindent.
+% We'll provide both values here for you so that you can choose 
+% which one you like in your document using a command such as:
+% setlength{\IEEEilabelindent}{\IEEEilabelindentB}
+\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentA
+\IEEEilabelindentA \parindent
+
+\newdimen\IEEEilabelindentB
+\IEEEilabelindentB 1.3\parindent
+% However, we'll default to using \parindent
+% which makes more sense to me
+\newdimen\IEEEilabelindent
+\IEEEilabelindent \IEEEilabelindentA
+
+
+% This controls the default amount the enumerated list labels
+% are indented to the right.
+% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention
+\newdimen\IEEEelabelindent
+\IEEEelabelindent \parindent
+
+% This controls the default amount the description list labels
+% are indented to the right.
+% Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention
+\newdimen\IEEEdlabelindent
+\IEEEdlabelindent \parindent
+
+% This is the value actually used within the IED lists.
+% The IED environments automatically set its value to
+% one of the three values above, so global changes do 
+% not have any effect
+\newdimen\IEEElabelindent
+\IEEElabelindent \parindent
+
+% The actual amount labels will be indented is
+% \IEEElabelindent multiplied by the factor below
+% corresponding to the level of nesting depth
+% This provides a means by which the user can
+% alter the effective \IEEElabelindent for deeper
+% levels
+% There may not be such a thing as correct "standard IEEE"
+% values. What IEEE actually does may depend on the specific
+% circumstances.
+% The first list level almost always has full indention.
+% The second levels I've seen have only 75% of the normal indentation
+% Three level or greater nestings are very rare. I am guessing
+% that they don't use any indentation.
+\def\IEEElabelindentfactori{1.0}   % almost always one
+\def\IEEElabelindentfactorii{0.75} % 0.0 or 1.0 may be used in some cases
+\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriii{0.0} % 0.75? 0.5? 0.0?
+\def\IEEElabelindentfactoriv{0.0}
+\def\IEEElabelindentfactorv{0.0}
+\def\IEEElabelindentfactorvi{0.0}
+
+% value actually used within IED lists, it is auto
+% set to one of the 6 values above
+% global changes here have no effect
+\def\IEEElabelindentfactor{1.0}
+
+% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED
+% list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for
+% the labels.
+\newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep
+\IEEEiednormlabelsep 0.6em
+
+% This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED
+% list labels and the list text, when math symbols are used for
+% the labels (nomenclature lists). IEEE usually increases the 
+% spacing in these cases
+\newdimen\IEEEiedmathlabelsep
+\IEEEiedmathlabelsep 1.2em
+
+% This controls the extra vertical separation put above and
+% below each IED list. IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing
+% around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable.
+\newskip\IEEEiedtopsep
+\IEEEiedtopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
+
+
+% This command is executed within each IED list environment
+% at the beginning of the list. You can use this to set the 
+% parameters for some/all your IED list(s) without disturbing 
+% global parameters that affect things other than lists.
+% i.e., renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\setlength{\labelsep}{5em}}
+% will alter the \labelsep for the next list(s) until 
+% \IEEEiedlistdecl is redefined. 
+\def\IEEEiedlistdecl{\relax}
+
+% This command provides an easy way to set \leftmargin based
+% on the \labelwidth, \labelsep and the argument \IEEElabelindent
+% Usage: \IEEEcalcleftmargin{width-to-indent-the-label}
+% output is in the \leftmargin variable, i.e., effectively:
+% \leftmargin = argument + \labelwidth + \labelsep
+% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
+\def\IEEEcalcleftmargin#1{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}%
+\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
+\addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}}
+
+% This command provides an easy way to set \labelwidth to the
+% width of the given text. It is the same as
+% \settowidth{\labelwidth}{label-text}
+% and useful as a shorter alternative.
+% Typically used to set \labelwidth to be the width
+% of the longest label in the list
+\def\IEEEsetlabelwidth#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}}
+
+% When this command is executed, IED lists will use the 
+% IEEEiedmathlabelsep label separation rather than the normal
+% spacing. To have an effect, this command must be executed via
+% the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list
+% environments.
+\def\IEEEusemathlabelsep{\setlength{\labelsep}{\IEEEiedmathlabelsep}}
+
+% A flag which controls whether the IED lists automatically
+% calculate \leftmargin from \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and \labelsep
+% Useful if you want to specify your own \leftmargin
+% This flag must be set (\IEEEnocalcleftmargintrue or \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse) 
+% via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list
+% environments to have an effect.
+\newif\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin
+\IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse
+
+% A flag which controls whether \IEEElabelindent is multiplied by
+% the \IEEElabelindentfactor for each list level.
+% This flag must be set via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option 
+% of the IED list environments to have an effect.
+\newif\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor
+\IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse
+
+
+% internal variable to indicate type of IED label
+% justification
+% 0 - left; 1 - center; 2 - right
+\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}
+
+
+% commands to allow the user to control IED
+% label justifications. Use these commands within
+% the IED environment option or in the \IEEEiedlistdecl
+% Note that changing the normal list justifications
+% is nonstandard and IEEE may not like it if you do so!
+% I include these commands as they may be helpful to
+% those who are using these enhanced list controls for
+% other non-IEEE related LaTeX work.
+% itemize and enumerate automatically default to right
+% justification, description defaults to left.
+\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}}%left
+\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{1}}%center
+\def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}}%right
+
+
+
+
+% commands to save to and restore from the list parameter copies
+% this allows us to set all the list parameters within
+% the list_decl and prevent \list (and its \@list) 
+% from overriding any of our parameters
+% V1.6 use \edefs instead of dimen's to conserve dimen registers
+% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
+\def\@IEEEsavelistparams{\edef\@IEEEiedtopsep{\the\topsep}%
+\edef\@IEEEiedlabelwidth{\the\labelwidth}%
+\edef\@IEEEiedlabelsep{\the\labelsep}%
+\edef\@IEEEiedleftmargin{\the\leftmargin}%
+\edef\@IEEEiedpartopsep{\the\partopsep}%
+\edef\@IEEEiedparsep{\the\parsep}%
+\edef\@IEEEieditemsep{\the\itemsep}%
+\edef\@IEEEiedrightmargin{\the\rightmargin}%
+\edef\@IEEEiedlistparindent{\the\listparindent}%
+\edef\@IEEEieditemindent{\the\itemindent}}
+
+% Note controlled spacing here
+\def\@IEEErestorelistparams{\topsep\@IEEEiedtopsep\relax%
+\labelwidth\@IEEEiedlabelwidth\relax%
+\labelsep\@IEEEiedlabelsep\relax%
+\leftmargin\@IEEEiedleftmargin\relax%
+\partopsep\@IEEEiedpartopsep\relax%
+\parsep\@IEEEiedparsep\relax%
+\itemsep\@IEEEieditemsep\relax%
+\rightmargin\@IEEEiedrightmargin\relax%
+\listparindent\@IEEEiedlistparindent\relax%
+\itemindent\@IEEEieditemindent\relax}
+
+
+% v1.6b provide original LaTeX IED list environments
+% note that latex.ltx defines \itemize and \enumerate, but not \description
+% which must be created by the base classes
+% save original LaTeX itemize and enumerate
+\let\LaTeXitemize\itemize
+\let\endLaTeXitemize\enditemize
+\let\LaTeXenumerate\enumerate
+\let\endLaTeXenumerate\endenumerate
+
+% provide original LaTeX description environment from article.cls
+\newenvironment{LaTeXdescription}
+               {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin
+                        \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}}
+               {\endlist}
+\newcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep
+                                 \normalfont\bfseries #1}
+
+
+% override LaTeX's default IED lists
+\def\itemize{\@IEEEitemize}
+\def\enditemize{\@endIEEEitemize}
+\def\enumerate{\@IEEEenumerate}
+\def\endenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate}
+\def\description{\@IEEEdescription}
+\def\enddescription{\@endIEEEdescription}
+
+% provide the user with aliases - may help those using packages that
+% override itemize, enumerate, or description
+\def\IEEEitemize{\@IEEEitemize}
+\def\endIEEEitemize{\@endIEEEitemize}
+\def\IEEEenumerate{\@IEEEenumerate}
+\def\endIEEEenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate}
+\def\IEEEdescription{\@IEEEdescription}
+\def\endIEEEdescription{\@endIEEEdescription}
+
+
+% V1.6 we want to keep the IEEEtran IED list definitions as our own internal
+% commands so they are protected against redefinition
+\def\@IEEEitemize{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEitemize}{\@@IEEEitemize[\relax]}}
+\def\@IEEEenumerate{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEenumerate}{\@@IEEEenumerate[\relax]}}
+\def\@IEEEdescription{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEdescription}{\@@IEEEdescription[\relax]}}
+\def\@endIEEEitemize{\endlist}
+\def\@endIEEEenumerate{\endlist}
+\def\@endIEEEdescription{\endlist}
+
+
+% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
+% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
+% IEEEtran itemized list MDS 1/2001
+% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
+\def\@@IEEEitemize[#1]{%
+                \ifnum\@itemdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else%
+                \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
+                \advance\@itemdepth\@ne%
+                \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
+                % get the labelindentfactor for this level
+                \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
+                \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
+                \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
+                \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default
+                % set other defaults
+                \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
+                \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
+                \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
+                \IEEElabelindent\IEEEilabelindent%
+                \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
+                \partopsep 0ex%
+                \parsep 0ex%
+                \itemsep 0ex%
+                \rightmargin 0em%
+                \listparindent 0em%
+                \itemindent 0em%
+                % calculate the label width
+                % the user can override this later if
+                % they specified a \labelwidth
+                \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth\endcsname}%
+                \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
+                \list{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{%
+                \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
+                                       % to our globals
+                \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
+                \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters
+                #1\relax%
+                % If the user has requested not to use the
+                % labelindent factor, don't revise \labelindent
+                \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
+                \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\labelindent%
+                \fi%
+                % Unless the user has requested otherwise,
+                % calculate our left margin based
+                % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
+                % \labelsep
+                \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
+                \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}%
+                \fi}\fi\fi}%
+
+
+% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
+% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
+% IEEEtran enumerate list MDS 1/2001
+% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
+\def\@@IEEEenumerate[#1]{%
+                \ifnum\@enumdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else%
+                \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
+                \advance\@enumdepth\@ne%
+                \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}%
+                % get the labelindentfactor for this level
+                \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
+                \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
+                \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
+                \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default
+                % set other defaults
+                \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
+                \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
+                \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep%
+                \IEEElabelindent\IEEEelabelindent%
+                \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
+                \partopsep 0ex%
+                \parsep 0ex%
+                \itemsep 0ex%
+                \rightmargin 0em%
+                \listparindent 0em%
+                \itemindent 0em%
+                % calculate the label width
+                % We'll set it to the width suitable for all labels using
+                % normalfont 1) to 9)
+                % The user can override this later
+                \settowidth{\labelwidth}{9)}%
+                \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
+                \list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter{\@enumctr}%
+                \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
+                                       % to our globals
+                \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
+                \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters 
+                #1\relax%
+                % If the user has requested not to use the
+                % IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent
+                \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
+                \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%
+                \fi%
+                % Unless the user has requested otherwise,
+                % calculate our left margin based
+                % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
+                % \labelsep
+                \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
+                \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}%
+                \fi}\fi\fi}%
+
+
+% DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS
+% AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS
+% IEEEtran description list MDS 1/2001
+% Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with %
+\def\@@IEEEdescription[#1]{%
+                \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else%
+                % get the labelindentfactor for this level
+                \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be
+                \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}%
+                \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment
+                \def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}% left justified labels are default
+                % set other defaults
+                \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse%
+                \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse%
+                \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% 
+                \IEEElabelindent\IEEEdlabelindent%
+                % assume normal labelsep
+                \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep%
+                \partopsep 0ex%
+                \parsep 0ex%
+                \itemsep 0ex%
+                \rightmargin 0em%
+                \listparindent 0em%
+                \itemindent 0em%
+                % Bogus label width in case the user forgets
+                % to set it.
+                % TIP: If you want to see what a variable's width is you
+                % can use the TeX command \showthe\width-variable to 
+                % display it on the screen during compilation 
+                % (This might be helpful to know when you need to find out
+                % which label is the widest)
+                \settowidth{\labelwidth}{Hello}%
+                \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters
+                \list{}{\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes
+                                               % to our globals
+                \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel
+                \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters 
+                #1\relax%
+                % If the user has requested not to use the
+                % labelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent
+                \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax%
+                \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent%
+                \fi%
+                % Unless the user has requested otherwise,
+                % calculate our left margin based
+                % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and
+                % \labelsep
+                \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax%
+                \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}\relax%
+                \fi}\fi}
+
+% v1.6b we use one makelabel that does justification as needed.
+\def\@IEEEiedmakelabel#1{\relax\if\@IEEEiedjustify 0\relax
+\makebox[\labelwidth][l]{\normalfont #1}\else
+\if\@IEEEiedjustify 1\relax
+\makebox[\labelwidth][c]{\normalfont #1}\else
+\makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi}
+
+
+% VERSE and QUOTE
+% V1.7 define environments with newenvironment
+\newenvironment{verse}{\let\\=\@centercr
+    \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em \listparindent \itemindent
+    \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item\relax}
+    {\endlist}
+\newenvironment{quotation}{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em \itemindent\listparindent
+    \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item\relax}
+    {\endlist}
+\newenvironment{quote}{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item\relax}
+    {\endlist}
+
+
+% \titlepage
+% provided only for backward compatibility. \maketitle is the correct
+% way to create the title page. 
+\newif\if@restonecol
+\def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
+    \else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@}
+\def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi}
+
+% standard values from article.cls
+\arraycolsep     5pt
+\arrayrulewidth .4pt
+\doublerulesep   2pt
+
+\tabcolsep       6pt
+\tabbingsep      0.5em
+
+
+%% FOOTNOTES
+%
+%\skip\footins 10pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
+% V1.6 respond to changes in font size
+% space added above the footnotes (if present)
+\skip\footins 0.9\baselineskip  plus 0.4\baselineskip  minus 0.2\baselineskip
+
+% V1.6, we need to make \footnotesep responsive to changes
+% in \baselineskip or strange spacings will result when in
+% draft mode. Here is a little LaTeX secret - \footnotesep
+% determines the height of an invisible strut that is placed
+% *above* the baseline of footnotes after the first. Since
+% LaTeX considers the space for characters to be 0.7/baselineskip
+% above the baseline and 0.3/baselineskip below it, we need to
+% use 0.7/baselineskip as a \footnotesep to maintain equal spacing
+% between all the lines of the footnotes. IEEE often uses a tad
+% more, so use 0.8\baselineskip. This slightly larger value also helps
+% the text to clear the footnote marks. Note that \thanks in IEEEtran
+% uses its own value of \footnotesep which is set in \maketitle.
+{\footnotesize
+\global\footnotesep 0.8\baselineskip}
+
+
+\skip\@mpfootins = \skip\footins
+\fboxsep = 3pt
+\fboxrule = .4pt
+% V1.6 use 1em, then use LaTeX2e's \@makefnmark
+% Note that IEEE normally *left* aligns the footnote marks, so we don't need
+% box resizing tricks here.
+\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1}% V1.6 use 1em
+% V1.7 compsoc does not use superscipts for footnote marks
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+\def\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark{\hbox{\normalfont\@thefnmark.\ }}
+\long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark}#1}
+\fi
+
+% IEEE does not use footnote rules
+\def\footnoterule{}
+
+% V1.7 for compsoc, IEEE uses a footnote rule only for \thanks. We devise a "one-shot"
+% system to implement this.
+\newif\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule
+\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+\def\footnoterule{\relax\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule
+\kern-5pt
+\hbox to \columnwidth{\hfill\vrule width 0.5\columnwidth height 0.4pt\hfill}
+\kern4.6pt
+\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse
+\else
+\relax
+\fi}
+\fi
+
+% V1.6 do not allow LaTeX to break a footnote across multiple pages
+\interfootnotelinepenalty=10000
+
+% V1.6 discourage breaks within equations
+% Note that amsmath normally sets this to 10000,
+% but LaTeX2e normally uses 100.
+\interdisplaylinepenalty=2500
+
+% default allows section depth up to /paragraph
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{4}
+
+% technotes do not allow /paragraph
+\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
+   \setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}
+\fi
+% neither do compsoc conferences
+\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}}
+
+
+\newcounter{section}
+\newcounter{subsection}[section]
+\newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection]
+\newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection]
+
+% used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray as other packages may
+% have their own, different, implementations
+\newcounter{IEEEsubequation}[equation]
+
+% as shown when called by user from \ref, \label and in table of contents
+\def\theequation{\arabic{equation}}                          % 1
+\def\theIEEEsubequation{\theequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}}  % 1a (used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray)
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+% compsoc is all arabic
+\def\thesection{\arabic{section}}                
+\def\thesubsection{\thesection.\arabic{subsection}}
+\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}}
+\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}}
+\else
+\def\thesection{\Roman{section}}                             % I
+% V1.7, \mbox prevents breaks around - 
+\def\thesubsection{\mbox{\thesection-\Alph{subsection}}}     % I-A
+% V1.7 use I-A1 format used by IEEE rather than I-A.1
+\def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection\arabic{subsubsection}}  % I-A1
+\def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection\alph{paragraph}}         % I-A1a
+\fi
+
+% From Heiko Oberdiek. Because of the \mbox in \thesubsection, we need to
+% tell hyperref to disable the \mbox command when making PDF bookmarks.
+% This done already with hyperref.sty version 6.74o and later, but
+% it will not hurt to do it here again for users of older versions.
+\@ifundefined{pdfstringdefPreHook}{\let\pdfstringdefPreHook\@empty}{}%
+\g@addto@macro\pdfstringdefPreHook{\let\mbox\relax}
+
+
+% Main text forms (how shown in main text headings)
+% V1.6, using \thesection in \thesectiondis allows changes
+% in the former to automatically appear in the latter
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+  \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
+    \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.}
+    \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis\arabic{subsection}.}
+    \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis\arabic{subsubsection}.}
+    \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis\arabic{paragraph}.}
+  \else% compsoc not conferencs
+    \def\thesectiondis{\thesection}
+    \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis.\arabic{subsection}}
+    \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis.\arabic{subsubsection}}
+    \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis.\arabic{paragraph}}
+  \fi
+\else% not compsoc
+  \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.}                   % I.
+  \def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}.}          % B.
+  \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\arabic{subsubsection})}  % 3)
+  \def\theparagraphdis{\alph{paragraph})}            % d)
+\fi
+
+% just like LaTeX2e's \@eqnnum
+\def\theequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theequation)}}% (1)
+% IEEEsubequation used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray
+\def\theIEEEsubequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theIEEEsubequation)}}% (1a)
+% redirect LaTeX2e's equation number display and all that depend on
+% it, through IEEEtran's \theequationdis
+\def\@eqnnum{\theequationdis}
+
+
+
+% V1.7 provide string macros as article.cls does
+\def\contentsname{Contents}
+\def\listfigurename{List of Figures}
+\def\listtablename{List of Tables}
+\def\refname{References}
+\def\indexname{Index}
+\def\figurename{Fig.}
+\def\tablename{TABLE}
+\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{Figure}\def\tablename{Table}}
+\def\partname{Part}
+\def\appendixname{Appendix}
+\def\abstractname{Abstract}
+% IEEE specific names
+\def\IEEEkeywordsname{Keywords}
+\def\IEEEproofname{Proof}
+
+
+% LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES AND TABLE OF CONTENTS
+%
+\def\@pnumwidth{1.55em}
+\def\@tocrmarg{2.55em}
+\def\@dotsep{4.5}
+\setcounter{tocdepth}{3}
+
+% adjusted some spacings here so that section numbers will not easily 
+% collide with the section titles. 
+% VIII; VIII-A; and VIII-A.1 are usually the worst offenders.
+% MDS 1/2001
+\def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname}\@starttoc{toc}}
+\def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt}%
+    \@tempdima 2.75em \begingroup \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth%
+    \parfillskip-\@pnumwidth {\bfseries\leavevmode #1}\hfil\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par%
+    \endgroup}
+% argument format #1:level, #2:labelindent,#3:labelsep
+\def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.75em}{3.75em}}
+\def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{6.5em}{4.5em}}
+% must provide \l@ defs for ALL sublevels EVEN if tocdepth
+% is such as they will not appear in the table of contents
+% these defs are how TOC knows what level these things are!
+\def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.5em}{5.5em}}
+\def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{6.5em}{6.5em}}
+\def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename}\@starttoc{lof}}
+\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.75em}}
+\def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename}\@starttoc{lot}}
+\let\l@table\l@figure
+
+
+%% Definitions for floats
+%%
+%% Normal Floats
+\floatsep 1\baselineskip plus  0.2\baselineskip minus  0.2\baselineskip
+\textfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus  0.2\baselineskip minus  0.4\baselineskip
+\@fptop 0pt plus 1fil
+\@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil 
+\@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil
+\def\topfraction{0.9}
+\def\bottomfraction{0.4}
+\def\floatpagefraction{0.8}
+% V1.7, let top floats approach 90% of page
+\def\textfraction{0.1}
+
+%% Double Column Floats
+\dblfloatsep 1\baselineskip plus  0.2\baselineskip minus  0.2\baselineskip
+
+\dbltextfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus  0.2\baselineskip minus  0.4\baselineskip
+% Note that it would be nice if the rubber here actually worked in LaTeX2e.
+% There is a long standing limitation in LaTeX, first discovered (to the best
+% of my knowledge) by Alan Jeffrey in 1992. LaTeX ignores the stretchable
+% portion of \dbltextfloatsep, and as a result, double column figures can and
+% do result in an non-integer number of lines in the main text columns with
+% underfull vbox errors as a consequence. A post to comp.text.tex
+% by Donald Arseneau confirms that this had not yet been fixed in 1998.
+% IEEEtran V1.6 will fix this problem for you in the titles, but it doesn't
+% protect you from other double floats. Happy vspace'ing.
+
+\@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil
+\@dblfpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil
+\@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil
+\def\dbltopfraction{0.8}
+\def\dblfloatpagefraction{0.8}
+\setcounter{dbltopnumber}{4}
+
+\intextsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus  0.2\baselineskip
+\setcounter{topnumber}{2}
+\setcounter{bottomnumber}{2}
+\setcounter{totalnumber}{4}
+
+
+
+% article class provides these, we should too.
+\newlength\abovecaptionskip
+\newlength\belowcaptionskip
+% but only \abovecaptionskip is used above figure captions and *below* table
+% captions
+\setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.5\baselineskip}
+\setlength\belowcaptionskip{0pt}
+% V1.6 create hooks in case the caption spacing ever needs to be
+% overridden by a user
+\def\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}%
+\def\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}%
+
+
+% 1.6b revise caption system so that \@makecaption uses two arguments
+% as with LaTeX2e. Otherwise, there will be problems when using hyperref.
+\def\@IEEEtablestring{table}
+
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+% V1.7 compsoc \@makecaption
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
+% test if is a for a figure or table
+\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
+% if a table, do table caption
+\normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}\end{center}%
+\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
+% if not a table, format it as a figure
+\else
+\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
+\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}%
+\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
+% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
+\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }%
+\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
+% if caption is shorter than a line, center
+\else%
+\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
+\fi\fi}
+\else% nonconference compsoc
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
+% test if is a for a figure or table
+\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
+% if a table, do table caption
+\normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #2}\end{center}%
+\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
+% if not a table, format it as a figure
+\else
+\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
+\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}%
+\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
+% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
+\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }%
+\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
+% if caption is shorter than a line, left justify
+\else%
+\hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
+\fi\fi}
+\fi
+
+\else% traditional noncompsoc \@makecaption
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
+% test if is a for a figure or table
+\ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring%
+% if a table, do table caption
+\footnotesize\begin{center}{\normalfont\footnotesize #1}\\{\normalfont\footnotesize\scshape #2}\end{center}%
+\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace
+% if not a table, format it as a figure
+\else
+\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace
+% 3/2001 use footnotesize, not small; use two nonbreaking spaces, not one
+\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ #2}%
+\ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize%
+% if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around
+\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ }%
+\parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize\noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}%
+% if caption is shorter than a line, center if conference, left justify otherwise
+\else%
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
+\else \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
+\fi\fi\fi}
+\fi
+
+
+
+% V1.7 disable captions class option, do so in a way that retains operation of \label
+% within \caption
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vspace*{2em}\footnotesize\begin{center}{\footnotesize #1}\end{center}%
+\let\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave\label
+\let\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax
+\def\label##1{\gdef\@IEEEtemplabelargsave{##1}}%
+\setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#2}%
+\let\label\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave
+\ifx\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax\else\label{\@IEEEtemplabelargsave}\fi}
+\fi
+
+
+% V1.7 define end environments with \def not \let so as to work OK with
+% preview-latex
+\newcounter{figure}
+\def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure}
+\def\fps@figure{tbp}
+\def\ftype@figure{1}
+\def\ext@figure{lof}
+\def\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure}
+\def\figure{\@float{figure}}
+\def\endfigure{\end@float}
+\@namedef{figure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}}
+\@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat}
+\newcounter{table}
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+\def\thetable{\arabic{table}}
+\else
+\def\thetable{\@Roman\c@table}
+\fi
+\def\fps@table{tbp}
+\def\ftype@table{2}
+\def\ext@table{lot}
+\def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable}
+% V1.6 IEEE uses 8pt text for tables
+% to default to footnotesize, we hack into LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset and pray
+\def\table{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@float{table}}
+\def\endtable{\end@float}
+% v1.6b double column tables need to default to footnotesize as well.
+\@namedef{table*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\footnotesize\@setminipage}\@dblfloat{table}}
+\@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat}
+
+
+
+
+%%
+%% START OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS
+%%
+%% Inspired by the concepts, examples, and previous works of LaTeX 
+%% coders and developers such as Donald Arseneau, Fred Bartlett, 
+%% David Carlisle, Tony Liu, Frank Mittelbach, Piet van Oostrum, 
+%% Roland Winkler and Mark Wooding.
+%% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;)
+
+
+% hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting
+\def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}}
+
+\newif\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form
+\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse
+
+\newif\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt% tracks if the environment should advance the col counter
+% allows a way to make an \IEEEeqnarraybox that can be used within an \IEEEeqnarray
+% used by IEEEeqnarraymulticol so that it can work properly in both
+\@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue
+
+\newcount\@IEEEeqnnumcols % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols are defined
+\newcount\@IEEEeqncolcnt  % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols the user actually used
+
+
+% The default math style used by the columns
+\def\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{\displaystyle}
+% The default text style used by the columns
+% default to using the current font
+\def\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle{\relax}
+
+% like the iedlistdecl but for \IEEEeqnarray
+\def\IEEEeqnarraydecl{\relax}
+\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl{\relax}
+
+% \yesnumber is the opposite of \nonumber
+% a novel concept with the same def as the equationarray package
+% However, we give IEEE versions too since some LaTeX packages such as 
+% the MDWtools mathenv.sty redefine \nonumber to something else.
+\providecommand{\yesnumber}{\global\@eqnswtrue}
+\def\IEEEyesnumber{\global\@eqnswtrue}
+\def\IEEEnonumber{\global\@eqnswfalse}
+
+
+\def\IEEEyessubnumber{\global\@IEEEissubequationtrue\global\@eqnswtrue%
+\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% only do something inside an IEEEeqnarray
+\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\addtocounter{equation}{-1}\else\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\fi%
+\def\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\fi}
+
+% flag to indicate that an equation is a sub equation
+\newif\if@IEEEissubequation%
+\@IEEEissubequationfalse
+
+% allows users to "push away" equations that get too close to the equation numbers
+\def\IEEEeqnarraynumspace{\hphantom{\if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\else\theequationdis\fi}}
+
+% provides a way to span multiple columns within IEEEeqnarray environments
+% will consider \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt before globally advancing the
+% column counter - so as to work within \IEEEeqnarraybox
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{number cols. to span}{col type}{cell text}
+\long\def\IEEEeqnarraymulticol#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}%
+% check if column is defined
+\relax\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
+\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#2\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
+\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#2\endcsname%
+\else% if not, error and use default type
+\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#2" in \string\IEEEeqnarraymulticol.\MessageBreak
+Using a default centering column instead}%
+{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}%
+\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE@IEEEdefault\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
+\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST@IEEEdefault\endcsname%
+\fi%
+% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
+\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by #1\relax\fi}
+
+% like \omit, but maintains track of the column counter for \IEEEeqnarray
+\def\IEEEeqnarrayomit{\omit\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax\fi}
+
+
+% provides a way to define a letter referenced column type
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{col. type letter/name}{pre insertion text}{post insertion text}
+\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcol#1#2#3{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#1\endcsname{#2}%
+\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#1\endcsname{#3}%
+\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname{1}}
+
+
+% provides a way to define a numerically referenced inter-column glue types
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep{col. glue number}{glue definition}
+\def\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep#1#2{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\romannumeral #1\endcsname{#2}%
+\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\romannumeral #1\endcsname{1}}
+
+
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined{1}% just a macro for 1, used for checking undefined column types
+
+
+% expands and appends the given argument to the \@IEEEtrantmptoksA token list
+% used to build up the \halign preamble
+\def\@IEEEappendtoksA#1{\edef\@@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA #1}}%
+\@@IEEEappendtoksA}
+
+% also appends to \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, but does not expand the argument
+% uses \toks8 as a scratchpad register
+\def\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA#1{\toks8={#1}%
+\edef\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\the\toks8}}%
+\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA}
+
+% define some common column types for the user
+% math
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{l}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{c}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{r}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{L}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{C}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{R}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$}
+% text
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{s}{\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{t}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{u}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{}
+
+% vertical rules
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{v}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{vv}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{V}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{VV}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}%
+{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth}
+
+% horizontal rules
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{h}{}{\leaders\hrule height\arrayrulewidth\hfil}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{H}{}{\leaders\vbox{\hrule width\arrayrulewidth\vskip\doublerulesep\hrule width\arrayrulewidth}\hfil}
+
+% plain
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{x}{}{}
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{X}{$}{$}
+
+% the default column type to use in the event a column type is not defined
+\IEEEeqnarraydefcol{@IEEEdefault}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil}
+
+
+% a zero tabskip (used for "-" col types)
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero{0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}
+% a centering tabskip (used for "+" col types)
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter{1000pt plus 0pt minus 1000pt}
+
+% top level default tabskip glues for the start, end, and inter-column
+% may be reset within environments not always at the top level, e.g., \IEEEeqnarraybox
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default start glue
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default end glue
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue
+
+
+
+% creates a vertical rule that extends from the bottom to the top a a cell
+% Provided in case other packages redefine \vline some other way.
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayvrule[rule thickness]
+% If no argument is provided, \arrayrulewidth will be used for the rule thickness. 
+\newcommand\IEEEeqnarrayvrule[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\vrule\@width#1\relax}
+
+% creates a blank separator row
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[separation length][font size commands]
+% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
+% blank arguments inherit the default values
+% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers
+\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprow{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}}
+\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][\relax]}}
+\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}%
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty%
+% get the skip value, based on the font commands
+% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3
+% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes
+{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}%
+\else%
+{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}%
+\fi%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
+
+% creates a blank separator row, but omits all the column templates
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[separation length][font size commands]
+% default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
+% blank arguments inherit the default values
+% uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers
+\def\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
+% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
+\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}}
+\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][\relax]}}
+\def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}%
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty%
+% get the skip value, based on the font commands
+% use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3
+% assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes
+{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}%
+\else%
+{\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}%
+\fi%
+\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
+
+
+
+% draws a single rule across all the columns optional
+% argument determines the rule width, \arrayrulewidth is the default
+% updates column counter as needed and turns off struts
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[rule line thickness]
+\def\IEEEeqnarrayrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
+% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
+\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}}
+\def\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]{\leaders\hrule height#1\hfil\relax% put in our rule 
+% turn off any struts
+\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]\relax}
+
+
+% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator row, and then
+% another single rule row 
+% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default
+% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing]
+\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
+% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
+\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}}
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]}%
+{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][\doublerulesep]}}
+\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
+% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][]
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
+\else%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]\relax%
+\fi%
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}%
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
+\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[\doublerulesep][\relax]%
+\else%
+\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#2][\relax]%
+\fi%
+\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}%
+% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
+\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
+\else%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
+\fi%
+}
+
+% draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator (cutting) row, and then
+% another single rule row 
+% first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default
+% second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing]
+\def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols
+% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
+\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[\arrayrulewidth]}}
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]}%
+{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][\doublerulesep]}}
+\def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
+% we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][]
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
+\else%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
+\fi%
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}%
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
+\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[\doublerulesep][\relax]%
+\else%
+\\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#2][\relax]%
+\fi%
+\\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}%
+% advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it
+\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi%
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}%
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]%
+\else%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]%
+\fi%
+}
+
+
+
+% inserts a full row's worth of &'s
+% relies on \@IEEEeqnnumcols to provide the correct number of columns
+% uses \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, \count0 as scratch registers
+\def\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}\count0=1\relax%
+\loop% add cols if the user did not use them all
+\ifnum\count0<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax%
+\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}%
+\advance\count0 by 1\relax% update the col count
+\repeat%
+\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%execute the &'s
+}
+
+
+
+\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner % flag to indicate if we are within the lines
+\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse    % of an IEEEeqnarray - after the IEEEeqnarraydecl
+
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{0pt} % height and depth of IEEEeqnarray struts
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{0pt}
+
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{0pt} % default height and depth of
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{0pt}  % struts within an IEEEeqnarray
+
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{0pt} % saved master strut height
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{0pt} % and depth
+
+\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut % flag to indicate that the master strut value
+\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue     % is to be used
+
+
+
+% saves the strut height and depth of the master strut
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave{\relax%
+\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
+\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
+% remove stretchability
+\dimen0\skip0\relax%
+\dimen2\skip2\relax%
+% save values
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{\the\dimen0}%
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{\the\dimen2}}
+
+% restores the strut height and depth of the master strut
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore{\relax%
+\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE\relax%
+\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE\relax%
+% remove stretchability
+\dimen0\skip0\relax%
+\dimen2\skip2\relax%
+% restore values
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}}
+
+
+% globally restores the strut height and depth to the 
+% master values and sets the master strut flag to true
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset{\relax%
+\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
+\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
+% remove stretchability
+\dimen0\skip0\relax%
+\dimen2\skip2\relax%
+% restore values
+\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
+\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
+\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue}
+
+
+% if the master strut is not to be used, make the current
+% values of \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight, \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth
+% and the use master strut flag, global
+% this allows user strut commands issued in the last column to be carried
+% into the isolation/strut column
+\def\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus{\relax%
+\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut\else%
+\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight}%
+\xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth}%
+\global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse%
+\fi}
+
+
+
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{height}{depth}[font size commands]
+% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, sets the height
+% and depth of both the master and local struts. If called inside
+% an IEEEeqnarray line, sets the height and depth of the local strut
+% only and sets the flag to indicate the use of the local strut
+% values. If the height or depth is left blank, 0.7\normalbaselineskip
+% and 0.3\normalbaselineskip will be used, respectively.
+% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under
+% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current
+% font is used.
+% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2
+\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}[\relax]}}
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#1}%
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty%
+{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.7\normalbaselineskip}}%
+\skip0=\skip3\relax%
+\else% arg one present
+{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1\relax}}%
+\skip0=\skip3\relax%
+\fi% if null arg
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#2}%
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty%
+{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.3\normalbaselineskip}}%
+\skip2=\skip3\relax%
+\else% arg two present
+{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2\relax}}%
+\skip2=\skip3\relax%
+\fi% if null arg
+% remove stretchability, just to be safe
+\dimen0\skip0\relax%
+\dimen2\skip2\relax%
+% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
+\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master
+\else% outer, have to set master strut too
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut
+\fi}
+
+
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{added height}{added depth}[font size commands]
+% If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, adds the given height
+% and depth to both the master and local struts.
+% If called inside an IEEEeqnarray line, adds the given height and depth
+% to the local strut only and sets the flag to indicate the use 
+% of the local strut values.
+% In both cases, if a height or depth is left blank, 0pt is used instead.
+% The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under
+% a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current
+% font is used.
+% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2
+\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}[\relax]}}
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#1}%
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty%
+\skip0=0pt\relax%
+\else% arg one present
+{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1}}%
+\skip0=\skip3\relax%
+\fi% if null arg
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#2}%
+\ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty%
+\skip2=0pt\relax%
+\else% arg two present
+{\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2}}%
+\skip2=\skip3\relax%
+\fi% if null arg
+% remove stretchability, just to be safe
+\dimen0\skip0\relax%
+\dimen2\skip2\relax%
+% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
+\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size
+% get local strut size
+\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax%
+\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax%
+% add it to the user supplied values
+\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax%
+\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax%
+% update the local strut size
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master
+\else% outer, have to set master strut too
+% get master strut size
+\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
+\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
+% add it to the user supplied values
+\advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax%
+\advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax%
+% update the local and master strut sizes
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}%
+\edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut
+\fi}
+
+
+% allow user a way to see the struts
+\newif\ifIEEEvisiblestruts
+\IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse
+
+% inserts an invisible strut using the master or local strut values
+% uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \dimen0, \dimen2
+\def\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut{\relax%
+\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut
+% get master strut size
+\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax%
+\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax%
+\else%
+% get local strut size
+\expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax%
+\expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax%
+\fi%
+% remove stretchability, probably not needed
+\dimen0\skip0\relax%
+\dimen2\skip2\relax%
+% dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth
+% allow user to see struts if desired
+\ifIEEEvisiblestruts%
+\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax%
+\else%
+\vrule width0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}
+
+
+% creates an invisible strut, useable even outside \IEEEeqnarray
+% if \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, the strut will be visible and 0.2pt wide. 
+% usage: \IEEEstrut[height][depth][font size commands]
+% default is \IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip][0.3\normalbaselineskip][\relax]
+% blank arguments inherit the default values
+% uses \dimen0, \dimen2, \skip0, \skip2
+\def\IEEEstrut{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEstrut}{\@IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip]}}
+\def\@IEEEstrut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEstrut[#1]}{\@@IEEEstrut[#1][0.3\normalbaselineskip]}}
+\def\@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]}{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][\relax]}}
+\def\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][#3]{\mbox{#3\relax%
+\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#1}%
+\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty%
+\skip0=0.7\normalbaselineskip\relax%
+\else%
+\skip0=#1\relax%
+\fi%
+\def\@IEEEstrutARG{#2}%
+\ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty%
+\skip2=0.3\normalbaselineskip\relax%
+\else%
+\skip2=#2\relax%
+\fi%
+% remove stretchability, probably not needed
+\dimen0\skip0\relax%
+\dimen2\skip2\relax%
+\ifIEEEvisiblestruts%
+\vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax%
+\else%
+\vrule width0.0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}}
+
+
+% enables strut mode by setting a default strut size and then zeroing the
+% \baselineskip, \lineskip, \lineskiplimit and \jot
+\def\IEEEeqnarraystrutmode{\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0.7\normalbaselineskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}[\relax]%
+\baselineskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt\lineskiplimit=0pt\jot=0pt}
+
+
+
+\def\IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarray}
+\def\endIEEEeqnarray{\end@IEEEeqnarray}
+
+\@namedef{IEEEeqnarray*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarray}
+\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarray*}{\end@IEEEeqnarray}
+
+
+% \IEEEeqnarray is an enhanced \eqnarray. 
+% The star form defaults to not putting equation numbers at the end of each row.
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarray[decl]{cols}
+\def\@IEEEeqnarray{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarray}{\@@IEEEeqnarray[\relax]}}
+\def\@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]#2{%
+   % default to showing the equation number or not based on whether or not
+   % the star form was involked
+   \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse
+   \else% not the star form
+   \global\@eqnswtrue
+   \fi% if star form
+   \@IEEEissubequationfalse% default to no subequations
+   \@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse% assume last line is not a sub equation
+   \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse% not yet within the lines of the halign
+   \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default
+   \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise
+   \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off
+   % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it
+   \lineskip=0pt\relax
+   \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax
+   \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax%
+   \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax%
+   \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
+   \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue% advance the col counter for each col the user uses, 
+                             % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build
+   \stepcounter{equation}% advance equation counter before first line
+   \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% no subequation yet 
+   \def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% redefine the ref label
+   \IEEEeqnarraydecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides
+   #1\relax% allow user to override defaults
+   \let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers
+   \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line
+   \@IEEEbuildpreamble #2\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA 
+   % put in the column for the equation number
+   \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first
+   \toks0={##}%
+   % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the isolation col, this helps with error checking
+   \@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}%
+   % add the isolation column
+   \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}%
+   % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the equation number col, this helps with error checking
+   \@IEEEappendtoksA{&\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}%
+   % add the equation number col to the preamble
+   \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss\the\toks0\egroup}%
+   % note \@IEEEeqnnumcols does not count the equation col or isolation col
+   % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build
+   \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax
+   % begin the display alignment
+   \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines
+   $$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup
+   % "exspand" the preamble
+   \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr}
+
+% enter isolation/strut column (or the next column if the user did not use
+% every column), record the strut status, complete the columns, do the strut if needed,
+% restore counters to correct values and exit
+\def\end@IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&\@@IEEEeqnarraycr\egroup%
+\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\global\advance\c@IEEEsubequation\m@ne\fi%
+\global\advance\c@equation\m@ne%
+$$\@ignoretrue}
+
+% need a way to remember if last line is a subequation
+\newif\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation%
+\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse
+
+% IEEEeqnarray uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to
+% end rows. This allows for things like \\*[vskip amount]
+% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray
+% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid
+% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the next column
+% as there is an isolation/strut column after the user's columns
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&% save strut status and advance to next column
+   {\ifnum0=`}\fi
+   \@ifstar{%
+      \global\@eqpen\@M\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR
+   }{%
+      \global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@IEEEeqnarrayYCR
+   }%
+}
+
+\def\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR\z@skip}
+
+\def\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR[#1]{%
+   \ifnum0=`{\fi}%
+   \@@IEEEeqnarraycr
+   \noalign{\penalty\@eqpen\vskip\jot\vskip #1\relax}}%
+
+\def\@@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register
+    \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by -1\relax% adjust col count because of the isolation column
+    \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt>\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax
+    \@IEEEclspkgerror{Too many columns within the IEEEeqnarray\MessageBreak
+                          environment}%
+    {Use fewer \string &'s or put more columns in the IEEEeqnarry column\MessageBreak 
+     specifications.}\relax%
+    \else
+    \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all
+    \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax
+    \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}%
+    \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax% update the col count
+    \repeat
+    % this number of &'s will take us the the isolation column
+    \fi
+    % execute the &'s
+    \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%
+    % handle the strut/isolation column
+    \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do the strut if needed
+    \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray
+    &% and enter the equation number column
+    % is this line needs an equation number, display it and advance the
+    % (sub)equation counters, record what type this line was
+    \if@eqnsw%
+     \if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\addtocounter{equation}{1}\stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}%
+     \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationtrue%
+     \else% display a standard equation number, initialize the IEEEsubequation counter
+     \theequationdis\stepcounter{equation}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}%
+     \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse\fi%
+    \fi%
+    % reset the eqnsw flag to indicate default preference of the display of equation numbers
+    \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi
+    \global\@IEEEissubequationfalse% reset the subequation flag
+    % reset the number of columns the user actually used
+    \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@\relax
+    % the real end of the line
+    \cr}
+
+
+
+
+
+% \IEEEeqnarraybox is like \IEEEeqnarray except the box form puts everything
+% inside a vtop, vbox, or vcenter box depending on the letter in the second
+% optional argument (t,b,c). Vbox is the default. Unlike \IEEEeqnarray,
+% equation numbers are not displayed and \IEEEeqnarraybox can be nested.
+% \IEEEeqnarrayboxm is for math mode (like \array) and does not put the vbox
+% within an hbox.
+% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt is for text mode (like \tabular) and puts the vbox within
+% a \hbox{$ $} construct.
+% \IEEEeqnarraybox will auto detect whether to use \IEEEeqnarrayboxm or 
+% \IEEEeqnarrayboxt depending on the math mode.
+% The third optional argument specifies the width this box is to be set to -
+% natural width is the default.
+% The * forms do not add \jot line spacing
+% usage: \IEEEeqnarraybox[decl][pos][width]{cols}
+\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxm{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxm{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+
+\def\IEEEeqnarrayboxt{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+\def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxt{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+\@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+
+\def\IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi%
+\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+\def\endIEEEeqnarraybox{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+
+\@namedef{IEEEeqnarraybox*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi%
+\@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+\@namedef{endIEEEeqnarraybox*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox}
+
+% flag to indicate if the \IEEEeqnarraybox needs to put things into an hbox{$ $} 
+% for \vcenter in non-math mode
+\newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW%
+\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse
+
+\def\@IEEEeqnarraybox{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox}{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[\relax]}}
+\def\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]}{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][b]}}
+\def\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]}{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][\relax]}}
+
+% #1 = decl; #2 = t,b,c; #3 = width, #4 = col specs
+\def\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][#3]#4{\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % not yet within the lines of the halign
+   \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave% save current master strut values
+   \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default
+   \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise
+   \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off
+   % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it
+   \lineskip=0pt\relax%
+   \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax%
+   \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax%
+   \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax%
+   \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
+   % the default end glues are zero for an \IEEEeqnarraybox
+   \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default start glue
+   \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default end glue
+   \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue
+   \@advanceIEEEeqncolcntfalse% do not advance the col counter for each col the user uses, 
+                              % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build
+   \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides
+   #1\relax% allow user to override defaults
+   \let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing
+   \@IEEEbuildpreamble #4\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA
+   % add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col
+   \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first
+   \toks0={##}%
+   % add the isolation column to the preamble
+   \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% 
+   % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build
+   \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax
+   % begin the alignment
+   \everycr{}%
+   % use only the very first token to determine the positioning
+   % this stops some problems when the user uses more than one letter,
+   % but is probably not worth the effort
+   % \noindent is used as a delimiter
+   \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
+   \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#2\relax\relax\noindent
+   % \@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded
+   % if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now
+   \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi%
+   % use the appropriate vbox type
+   \if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken c\relax%
+   \vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup%
+   \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines
+   \ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi%
+   \bgroup
+   % "exspand" the preamble
+   \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr}
+
+% carry strut status and enter the isolation/strut column, 
+% exit from math mode if needed, and exit
+\def\end@IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status
+&% enter isolation/strut column
+\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed
+\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore% restore the previous master strut values
+% reset the strut system for next IEEEeqnarray
+% (sets local strut values back to previous master strut values)
+\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset%
+% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox
+\crcr\egroup\egroup%
+% exit from math mode and close hbox if needed
+\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW $\egroup\fi}
+
+
+
+% IEEEeqnarraybox uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to
+% end rows. This allows for things like \\[vskip amount]
+% This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray
+% For IEEEeqnarraybox, \\* is the same as \\
+% the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid
+% altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the isolation/strut column
+% carry strut status into isolation/strut column
+\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status
+&% enter isolation/strut column
+\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed
+% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray
+\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset%
+{\ifnum0=`}\fi%
+\@ifstar{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}}
+
+% test and setup the optional argument to \\[]
+\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR\z@skip}
+
+% IEEEeqnarraybox does not automatically increase line spacing by \jot
+\def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}%
+\cr\noalign{\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\else\vskip\jot\fi\vskip#1\relax}}
+
+
+
+% starts the halign preamble build
+\def\@IEEEbuildpreamble{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register
+\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known
+\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start
+\let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known
+% ensure these are valid
+\def\@IEEEBPcurglue={0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}%
+\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}% name of current column definition
+% currently acquired numerically referenced glue
+% use a name that is easier to remember
+\let\@IEEEBPcurnum=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
+\@IEEEBPcurnum=0%
+% tracks number of columns in the preamble
+\@IEEEeqnnumcols=0%
+% record the default end glues
+\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}%
+\edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}%
+% now parse the user's column specifications
+\@@IEEEbuildpreamble}
+
+
+% parses and builds the halign preamble
+\def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble%
+% use only the very first token to check the end
+% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here
+\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
+\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
+\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else%
+% identify current and next token type
+\@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid
+\@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next
+% if curtype is a glue, get the glue def
+\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEgetcurglue{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurglue}\fi%
+% if curtype is a column, get the column def and set the current column name
+\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEgetcurcol{#1}\fi%
+% if curtype is a numeral, acquire the user defined glue
+\if\@IEEEBPcurtype n\@IEEEprocessNcol{#1}\fi%
+% process the acquired glue 
+\if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEprocessGcol\fi%
+% process the acquired col 
+\if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEprocessCcol\fi%
+% ready prevtype for next col spec.
+\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPcurtype%
+% be sure and put back the future token(s) as a group
+\fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}}
+
+
+% executed just after preamble build is completed
+% warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue
+\def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax
+\@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}%
+{At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}%
+\fi%num cols less than 1
+%if last type undefined, set default end tabskip glue
+\if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi}
+
+
+% Identify and return the column specifier's type code
+\def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{%
+% use only the very first token to determine the type
+% \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here
+\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
+\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
+% \@IEEEgrabfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded
+% n = number
+% g = glue (any other char in catagory 12)
+% c = letter
+% e = \end
+% u = undefined
+% third argument: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char
+\let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise
+\ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let#2=e\else
+\ifcat\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences
+\if0\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
+\if1\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
+\if2\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
+\if3\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
+\if4\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
+\if5\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
+\if6\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
+\if7\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
+\if8\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
+\if9\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else
+\ifcat,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=g\relax
+\else\ifcat a\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+\if#2u\relax
+\if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}%
+{Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak
+as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi}
+
+
+% identify the current letter referenced column
+% if invalid, use a default column
+\def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
+\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name
+\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak
+Using a default centering column instead}%
+{You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}%
+\def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi}
+
+
+% identify and return the predefined (punctuation) glue value
+\def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{%
+% ! = \! (neg small)  -0.16667em (-3/18 em)
+% , = \, (small)       0.16667em ( 3/18 em)
+% : = \: (med)         0.22222em ( 4/18 em)
+% ; = \; (large)       0.27778em ( 5/18 em)
+% ' = \quad            1em
+% " = \qquad           2em
+% . = 0.5\arraycolsep
+% / = \arraycolsep
+% ? = 2\arraycolsep
+% * = 1fil
+% + = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter
+% - = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero
+% Note that all em values are referenced to the math font (textfont2) fontdimen6
+% value for 1em.
+% 
+% use only the very first token to determine the type
+% this prevents errant tokens from getting in the main text
+% \noindent is used as a delimiter here
+\def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}%
+\@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent
+% get the math font 1em value
+% LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs
+% to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters.
+% So we create a bogus box here that uses the math font to ensure
+% that \textfont2 is loaded and ready. If this is not done,
+% the \textfont2 stuff here may not work.
+% Thanks to Bernd Raichle for his 1997 post on this topic.
+{\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\relax$}}%
+% fontdimen6 has the width of 1em (a quad).
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax%
+% identify the glue value based on the first token
+% we discard anything after the first
+\if!\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if:\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if;\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if'\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if"\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if.\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if/\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else
+\if?\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else
+\if *\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else
+\if+\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else
+\if-\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else
+\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}%
+\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak
+column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak
+0pt instead}%
+{Only !,:;'"./?*+ and - are valid predefined glue types in the\MessageBreak 
+IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
+
+
+
+% process a numerical digit from the column specification
+% and look up the corresponding user defined glue value
+% can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired
+\def\@IEEEprocessNcol#1{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%
+\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak
+specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak
+after the first}%
+{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak 
+in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}%
+\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue, future digits will be discarded
+\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%
+\else% if we previously aborted a glue
+\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain digit abortion
+\else%acquire this number
+% save the previous type before the numerical digits started
+\if\@IEEEBPprevtype n\else\let\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype=\@IEEEBPprevtype\fi%
+\multiply\@IEEEBPcurnum by 10\relax%
+\advance\@IEEEBPcurnum by #1\relax% add in number, \relax is needed to stop TeX's number scan
+\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else%close acquisition
+\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined%
+\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname}%
+\else%user glue not defined
+\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid user defined inter-column glue type "\number\@IEEEBPcurnum" in\MessageBreak
+column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak
+0pt instead}%
+{You must define all IEEEeqnarray numerical inter-column glue types via\MessageBreak
+\string\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep \space before they are used in column specifications.}%
+\edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}%
+\fi% glue defined or not
+\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=g% change the type to reflect the acquired glue
+\let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype% restore the prev type before this number glue
+\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%ready for next acquisition
+\fi%close acquisition, get glue
+\fi%discard or acquire number
+\fi%prevtype glue or not
+}
+
+
+% process an acquired glue
+% add any acquired column/glue pair to the preamble
+\def\@IEEEprocessGcol{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain previous glue abortions
+\else
+% if this is the start glue, save it, but do nothing else 
+% as this is not used in the preamble, but before
+\if\@IEEEBPprevtype s\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEBPcurglue}%
+\else%not the start glue
+\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%ignore if back to back glues
+\@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak
+specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak
+after the first}%
+{You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak 
+in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}%
+\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue
+\else% not a back to back glue
+\if\@IEEEBPprevtype c\relax% if the previoustype was a col, add column/glue pair to preamble
+\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi
+\toks0={##}%
+% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this
+\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi
+% insert the column defintion into the preamble, being careful not to expand
+% the column definition
+\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPcurglue}%
+\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}%
+\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
+\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}%
+\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}%
+\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
+\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}%
+\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
+\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
+\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}%
+\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble
+\else% error: non-start glue with no pending column
+\@IEEEclspkgerror{Inter-column glue specifier without a prior column\MessageBreak
+type in the column specifications. Ignoring this glue\MessageBreak 
+specifier}%
+{Except for the first and last positions, glue can be placed only\MessageBreak
+between column types.}%
+\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue
+\fi% previous was a column
+\fi% back-to-back glues
+\fi% is start column glue
+\fi% prev type not a
+}
+
+
+% process an acquired letter referenced column and, if necessary, add it to the preamble
+\def\@IEEEprocessCcol{\if\@IEEEBPnexttype g\else
+\if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else
+% we have a column followed by something other than a glue (or numeral glue)
+% so we must add this column to the preamble now
+\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi%col separator for those after the first
+\if\@IEEEBPnexttype e\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue\relax}\else%put in end glue
+\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid\relax}\fi% or default mid glue
+\toks0={##}%
+% make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this
+\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi
+% insert the column definition into the preamble, being careful not to expand
+% the column definition
+\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}%
+\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
+\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}%
+\@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}%
+\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
+\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}%
+\@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}%
+\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax%
+\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}%
+\advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble
+\fi%next type not numeral
+\fi%next type not glue
+}
+
+
+%%
+%% END OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS
+%%
+
+
+
+
+% set up the running headings, this complex because of all the different
+% modes IEEEtran supports
+\if@twoside
+ \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
+   \def\ps@headings{%
+       \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}
+       \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}
+       \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
+            \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot
+               \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
+            \else
+               \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT}
+               \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date}
+            \fi
+       \else
+            \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}
+       \fi}
+ \else % not a technote
+   \def\ps@headings{%
+       \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
+        \def\@oddhead{}
+        \def\@evenhead{}
+       \else
+        \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage}
+        \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}
+       \fi
+       \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
+            \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage}
+            \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}
+            \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot
+               \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
+            \else
+               \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT}
+               \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date}
+            \fi
+       \else
+            \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
+       \fi}
+ \fi
+\else % single side
+\def\ps@headings{%
+    \ifCLASSOPTIONconference
+     \def\@oddhead{}
+     \def\@evenhead{}
+    \else
+     \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}
+     \def\@evenhead{}
+    \fi
+    \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
+          \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}
+          \def\@evenhead{}
+          \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot
+             \def\@oddfoot{}
+          \else
+             \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date \hfil DRAFT}
+          \fi
+    \else
+         \def\@oddfoot{}
+    \fi
+    \def\@evenfoot{}}
+\fi
+
+
+% title page style
+\def\ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle{\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
+   \def\@oddhead{}%
+   \def\@evenhead{}%
+\else
+   \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}%
+   \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}%
+\fi
+\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
+   \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}%
+   \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}%
+   \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else
+      \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}%
+      \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}%
+   \fi
+\else
+   % all non-draft mode footers
+   \if@IEEEusingpubid
+      % for title pages that are using a pubid
+      % do not repeat pubid if using peer review option
+      \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
+      \else
+         \footskip 0pt%
+         \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsocconf
+           \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
+           \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
+         \else
+           \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
+           \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
+         \fi
+      \fi
+   \fi
+\fi}
+
+
+% peer review cover page style
+\def\ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle{%
+\def\@oddhead{}\def\@evenhead{}%
+\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}%
+\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
+   \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else
+      \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}%
+      \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}%
+   \fi
+\else
+   % non-draft mode footers
+   \if@IEEEusingpubid
+      \footskip 0pt%
+      \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+        \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
+        \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
+      \else
+        \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
+        \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}%
+      \fi
+   \fi
+\fi}
+
+
+% start with empty headings
+\def\rightmark{}\def\leftmark{}
+
+
+%% Defines the command for putting the header. \footernote{TEXT} is the same
+%% as \markboth{TEXT}{TEXT}. 
+%% Note that all the text is forced into uppercase, if you have some text
+%% that needs to be in lower case, for instance et. al., then either manually
+%% set \leftmark and \rightmark or use \MakeLowercase{et. al.} within the
+%% arguments to \markboth.
+\def\markboth#1#2{\def\leftmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#1}}%
+\def\rightmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#2}}}
+\def\footernote#1{\markboth{#1}{#1}}
+
+\def\today{\ifcase\month\or
+    January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
+    July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi
+    \space\number\day, \number\year}
+
+
+
+
+%% CITATION AND BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMANDS
+%% 
+%% V1.6 no longer supports the older, nonstandard \shortcite and \citename setup stuff
+% 
+% 
+% Modify Latex2e \@citex to separate citations with "], ["
+\def\@citex[#1]#2{%
+  \let\@citea\@empty
+  \@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do
+    {\@citea\def\@citea{], [}%
+     \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}%
+     \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi
+     \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}%
+       \G@refundefinedtrue
+       \@latex@warning
+         {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}%
+       {\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}}{#1}}
+
+% V1.6 we create hooks for the optional use of Donald Arseneau's
+% cite.sty package. cite.sty is "smart" and will notice that the
+% following format controls are already defined and will not
+% redefine them. The result will be the proper sorting of the
+% citation numbers and auto detection of 3 or more entry "ranges" -
+% all in IEEE style:  [1], [2], [5]--[7], [12]
+% This also allows for an optional note, i.e., \cite[mynote]{..}.
+% If the \cite with note has more than one reference, the note will
+% be applied to the last of the listed references. It is generally
+% desired that if a note is given, only one reference is listed in
+% that \cite.
+% Thanks to Mr. Arseneau for providing the required format arguments
+% to produce the IEEE style.
+\def\citepunct{], [}
+\def\citedash{]--[}
+
+% V1.7 default to using same font for urls made by url.sty
+\AtBeginDocument{\csname url@samestyle\endcsname}
+
+% V1.6 class files should always provide these
+\def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em}
+\let\@openbib@code\@empty
+
+
+% Provide support for the control entries of IEEEtran.bst V1.00 and later.
+% V1.7 optional argument allows for a different aux file to be specified in
+% order to handle multiple bibliographies. For example, with multibib.sty:
+% \newcites{sec}{Secondary Literature}
+% \bstctlcite[@auxoutsec]{BSTcontrolhak}
+\def\bstctlcite{\@ifnextchar[{\@bstctlcite}{\@bstctlcite[@auxout]}}
+\def\@bstctlcite[#1]#2{\@bsphack
+  \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{%
+    \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}%
+    \if@filesw\immediate\write\csname #1\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}%
+  \@esphack}
+
+% V1.6 provide a way for a user to execute a command just before 
+% a given reference number - used to insert a \newpage to balance
+% the columns on the last page
+\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{0}   % the default of zero means that
+                              % the command is not executed
+\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{\newpage}
+
+% allow the user to alter the triggered command
+\long\def\IEEEtriggercmd#1{\long\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{#1}}
+
+% allow user a way to specify the reference number just before the
+% command is executed
+\def\IEEEtriggeratref#1{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=#1%
+\edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA}}%
+
+% trigger command at the given reference
+\def\@IEEEbibitemprefix{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtriggerrefnum\relax%
+\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax%
+\ifnum\c@enumiv=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax\@IEEEtriggercmd\relax\fi}
+
+
+\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]}
+
+% compsoc journals left align the reference numbers
+\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}}
+
+% controls bib item spacing
+\def\IEEEbibitemsep{0pt plus .5pt}
+
+\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}}
+
+
+\def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname}%
+    \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}%
+    % V1.6 add some rubber space here and provide a command trigger
+    \footnotesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\small}\vskip 0.3\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip%
+    \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
+    {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
+    \leftmargin\labelwidth
+    \advance\leftmargin\labelsep\relax
+    \itemsep \IEEEbibitemsep\relax
+    \usecounter{enumiv}%
+    \let\p@enumiv\@empty
+    \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
+    \let\@IEEElatexbibitem\bibitem%
+    \def\bibitem{\@IEEEbibitemprefix\@IEEElatexbibitem}%
+\def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}%
+% originally:
+%   \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000%
+% by adding the \interlinepenalty here, we make it more
+% difficult, but not impossible, for LaTeX to break within a reference.
+% IEEE almost never breaks a reference (but they do it more often with
+% technotes). You may get an underfull vbox warning around the bibliography, 
+% but the final result will be much more like what IEEE will publish. 
+% MDS 11/2000
+\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty100%
+\else\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty500\fi%
+    \sfcode`\.=1000\relax}
+\let\endthebibliography=\endlist
+
+
+
+
+% TITLE PAGE COMMANDS
+% 
+% 
+% \IEEEmembership is used to produce the sublargesize italic font used to indicate author 
+% IEEE membership. compsoc uses a large size sans slant font
+\def\IEEEmembership#1{{\@IEEEnotcompsoconly{\sublargesize}\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\textit{#1}}}
+ 
+
+% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a footnote type symbol to indicate author affiliation.
+% When given an argument of 1 to 9, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} follows the standard LaTeX footnote
+% symbol sequence convention. However, for arguments 10 and above, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} 
+% reverts to using lower case roman numerals, so it cannot overflow. Do note that you 
+% cannot use \footnotemark[] in place of \IEEEauthorrefmark{} within \author as the footnote
+% symbols will have been turned off to prevent \thanks from creating footnote marks.
+% \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a symbol that appears to LaTeX as having zero vertical
+% height - this allows for a more compact line packing, but the user must ensure that
+% the interline spacing is large enough to prevent \IEEEauthorrefmark{} from colliding
+% with the text above.
+% V1.7 make this a robust command
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or%
+    \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger%
+    \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\textsuperscript{\expandafter\romannumeral#1}\fi}}}}
+
+
+% FONT CONTROLS AND SPACINGS FOR CONFERENCE MODE AUTHOR NAME AND AFFILIATION BLOCKS
+% 
+% The default font styles for the author name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
+%\def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}}
+%\def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}}
+\def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\normalsize}
+\def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize}
+
+% The default if the user does not use an author block
+\def\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize}
+
+% spacing from title (or special paper notice) to author name blocks (confmode)
+% can be negative
+\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{-0.25em}
+% compsoc conferences need more space here
+\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}}
+
+% spacing between name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
+% This can be negative.
+% IEEE doesn't want any added spacing here, but I will leave these
+% controls in place in case they ever change their mind.
+% Personally, I like 0.75ex.
+%\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.75ex}
+%\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.75ex}
+\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.0ex}
+\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.0ex}
+% baseline spacing within name and affiliation blocks (confmode)
+% must be positive, spacings below certain values will make 
+% the position of line of text sensitive to the contents of the
+% line above it i.e., whether or not the prior line has descenders, 
+% subscripts, etc. For this reason it is a good idea to keep
+% these above 2.6ex
+\def\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace{2.6ex}
+\def\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace{2.75ex}
+
+% This tracks the required strut size.
+% See the \@IEEEauthorhalign command for the actual default value used.
+\def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}
+
+% variables to retain font size and style across groups
+% values given here have no effect as they will be overwritten later
+\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize{10}
+\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip{12}
+\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding{OT1}
+\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily{ptm}
+\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries{m}
+\gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape{n}
+
+% saves the current font attributes
+\def\@IEEEcurfontSAVE{\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize\f@size%
+\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip\f@baselineskip%
+\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding\f@encoding%
+\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily\f@family%
+\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries\f@series%
+\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape\f@shape}
+
+% restores the saved font attributes
+\def\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE{\fontsize{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize}{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip}%
+\fontencoding{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding}%
+\fontfamily{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily}%
+\fontseries{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries}%
+\fontshape{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape}%
+\selectfont}
+
+
+% variable to indicate if the current block is the first block in the column
+\newif\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol   \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse
+
+
+% the command places a strut with height and depth = \@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace
+% we use this technique to have complete manual control over the spacing of the lines
+% within the halign environment.
+% We set the below baseline portion at 30%, the above
+% baseline portion at 70% of the total length.
+% Responds to changes in the document's \baselinestretch
+\def\@IEEEauthorstrutrule{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace%
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselinestretch\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
+\rule[-0.3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA]{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}}
+
+
+% blocks to hold the authors' names and affilations. 
+% Makes formatting easy for conferences
+%
+% use real definitions in conference mode
+% name block
+\def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle% set the default text style
+\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}% disable strut for spacer row
+% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs
+% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro
+% do a spacer row if needed
+\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline\fi
+\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column
+%restore the correct strut value
+\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace}%
+% input the author names
+#1%
+% end the row if the user did not already
+\crcr}
+% spacer row for names
+\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace}}
+%
+% affiliation block
+\def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle% set the default text style
+\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}%disable strut for spacer row
+% the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs
+% for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro
+% do a spacer row if needed
+\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline\fi
+\global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column
+%restore the correct strut value
+\gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace}%
+% input the author affiliations
+#1%
+% end the row if the user did not already
+\crcr}
+% spacer row for affiliations
+\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace}}
+
+
+% allow papers to compile even if author blocks are used in modes other
+% than conference or peerreviewca. For such cases, we provide dummy blocks.
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
+\else
+   \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca\else
+      % not conference or peerreviewca mode
+      \def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{#1}%
+      \def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{#1}%
+   \fi
+\fi
+
+
+
+% we provide our own halign so as not to have to depend on tabular
+\def\@IEEEauthorhalign{\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle% default text style
+   \lineskip=0pt\relax% disable line spacing
+   \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax%
+   \baselineskip=0pt\relax%
+   \@IEEEcurfontSAVE% save the current font
+   \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math
+   \let\\\@IEEEauthorhaligncr% replace newline with halign friendly one
+   \tabskip=0pt\relax% no column spacing
+   \everycr{}% ensure no problems here
+   \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse% no author blocks yet
+   \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}% default interline space
+   \vtop\bgroup%vtop box
+   \halign\bgroup&\relax\hfil\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE\relax ##\relax
+   \hfil\@IEEEcurfontSAVE\@IEEEauthorstrutrule\cr}
+
+% ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox
+\def\end@IEEEauthorhalign{\crcr\egroup\egroup}
+
+% handle bogus star form
+\def\@IEEEauthorhaligncr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}}
+
+% test and setup the optional argument to \\[]
+\def\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr{\@testopt\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr\z@skip}
+
+% end the line and do the optional spacer
+\def\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\cr\noalign{\vskip#1\relax}}
+
+
+
+% flag to prevent multiple \and warning messages
+\newif\if@IEEEWARNand
+\@IEEEWARNandtrue
+
+% if in conference or peerreviewca modes, we support the use of \and as \author is a
+% tabular environment, otherwise we warn the user that \and is invalid
+% outside of conference or peerreviewca modes.
+\def\and{\relax} % provide a bogus \and that we will then override
+
+\renewcommand{\and}[1][\relax]{\if@IEEEWARNand\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\and is valid only
+                               when in conference or peerreviewca}\typeout{modes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNandfalse}
+
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
+\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%
+\fi
+\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca
+\renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}%
+\fi
+
+
+% page clearing command
+% based on LaTeX2e's \cleardoublepage, but allows different page styles
+% for the inserted blank pages
+\def\@IEEEcleardoublepage#1{\clearpage\if@twoside\ifodd\c@page\else
+\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\fi\fi\fi}
+
+
+% user command to invoke the title page
+\def\maketitle{\par%
+  \begingroup%
+  \normalfont%
+  \def\thefootnote{}%  the \thanks{} mark type is empty
+  \def\footnotemark{}% and kill space from \thanks within author
+  \let\@makefnmark\relax% V1.7, must *really* kill footnotemark to remove all \textsuperscript spacing as well.
+  \footnotesize%       equal spacing between thanks lines
+  \footnotesep 0.7\baselineskip%see global setting of \footnotesep for more info
+  % V1.7 disable \thanks note indention for compsoc
+  \@IEEEcompsoconly{\long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent\hbox{\@makefnmark}##1}}%
+  \normalsize%
+  \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
+     \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
+     \thispagestyle{IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle}\@thanks%
+  \else
+     \if@twocolumn%
+        \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%
+           \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
+        \else
+           \twocolumn[\@maketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace\@IEEEaftertitletext]%
+        \fi
+     \else
+        \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext%
+     \fi
+     \thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}\@thanks%
+  \fi
+  % pullup page for pubid if used.
+  \if@IEEEusingpubid
+     \enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}%
+  \fi 
+  \endgroup
+  \setcounter{footnote}{0}\let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax
+  \gdef\@thanks{}%
+  % v1.6b do not clear these as we will need the title again for peer review papers
+  % \gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}%
+  \let\thanks\relax}
+
+
+
+% V1.7 parbox to format \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext
+\long\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.915\textwidth}{#1}}
+
+
+% formats the Title, authors names, affiliations and special paper notice
+% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING COMMAND! Do not allow blank lines or unintentional
+% spaces to enter the definition - use % at the end of each line
+\def\@maketitle{\newpage
+\begin{center}%
+\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technotes
+   {\bfseries\large\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@title\par}\vskip 1.3em{\lineskip .5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@author
+   \@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
+   \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par
+   \hfill\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
+\else% not a technote
+   \vskip0.2em{\Huge\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\normalfont\normalsize\vskip 0\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip
+   \bfseries\Large}\@title\par}\vskip 1.0em\par%
+   % V1.6 handle \author differently if in conference mode
+   \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
+      {\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
+       \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par}\relax
+   \else% peerreviewca, peerreview or journal
+      \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca
+         % peerreviewca handles author names just like conference mode
+         {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace%
+          \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par
+          {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
+           \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill
+           \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
+      \else% journal or peerreview
+         {\lineskip.5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@author\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par
+          {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax
+           \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill
+           \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax
+      \fi
+   \fi
+\fi\end{center}}
+
+
+
+% V1.7 Computer Society "diamond line" which follows index terms for nonconference papers
+\def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\hspace{7.5pt}%
+\raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}%
+\hspace{7.5pt}\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax}
+
+% V1.7 standard LateX2e \thanks, but with \itshape under compsoc. Also make it a \long\def
+% We also need to trigger the one-shot footnote rule
+\def\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule{\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoteruletrue}
+
+
+\long\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark
+    \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
+        \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\itshape
+        \protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule\relax}\ignorespaces#1}}}
+\let\@thanks\@empty
+
+% V1.7 allow \author to contain \par's. This is needed to allow \thanks to contain \par.
+\long\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}}
+
+
+% in addition to setting up IEEEitemize, we need to remove a baselineskip space above and
+% below it because \list's \pars introduce blank lines because of the footnote struts.
+\def\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist{\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}%
+\setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}%
+\setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0.5\baselineskip}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\relax}
+
+
+% flag for fake non-compsoc \IEEEcompsocthanksitem - prevents line break on very first item
+\newif\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem \@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse
+
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+% V1.7 compsoc bullet item \thanks
+% also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace
+\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\relax\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse\footnotemark
+    \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks
+        \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\itshape\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule
+        {\let\IEEEiedlistdecl\relax\protect\begin{IEEEitemize}[\protect\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist]\ignorespaces#1\relax
+        \protect\end{IEEEitemize}}\protect\vspace{-1\baselineskip}}}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\item}
+\else
+% non-compsoc, allow for dual compilation via rerouting to normal \thanks
+\long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\thanks{#1}}
+% redirect to "pseudo-par" \hfil\break\indent after swallowing [] from \IEEEcompsocthanksitem[]
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg}%
+{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[\relax]}}
+% be sure and break only after first item, be sure and ignore spaces after optional argument
+\def\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[#1]{\relax\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem\hfil\break
+\indent\fi\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemtrue\ignorespaces}
+\fi
+
+
+% V1.6b define the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle as needed
+\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
+\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\@IEEEcleardoublepage{empty}%
+\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn
+\twocolumn[\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace]
+\else
+\newpage\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip
+\fi
+\thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}}
+\else
+% \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle does nothing if peer review option has not been selected
+\def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\relax}
+\fi
+
+% peerreview formats the repeated title like the title in journal papers.
+\def\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\begin{center}\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}%
+\normalfont\normalsize\vskip0.2em{\Huge\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par
+\end{center}}
+
+
+
+% V1.6 
+% this is a static rubber spacer between the title/authors and the main text
+% used for single column text, or when the title appears in the first column
+% of two column text (technotes). 
+\def\@IEEEstatictitlevskip{{\normalfont\normalsize
+% adjust spacing to next text
+% v1.6b handle peer review papers
+\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
+% for peer review papers, the same value is used for both title pages
+% regardless of the other paper modes
+   \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip
+\else
+   \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference
+      \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip%
+   \else%
+      \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote
+         \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip%
+      \else% journal uses more space
+         \vskip 2.5\baselineskip plus 0.75\baselineskip minus 0.375\baselineskip%
+      \fi
+   \fi
+\fi}}
+
+
+% V1.6
+% This is a dynamically determined rigid spacer between the title/authors 
+% and the main text. This is used only for single column titles over two 
+% column text (most common)
+% This is bit tricky because we have to ensure that the textheight of the
+% main text is an integer multiple of \baselineskip
+% otherwise underfull vbox problems may develop in the second column of the
+% text on the titlepage
+% The possible use of \IEEEpubid must also be taken into account.
+\def\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace{{%
+    % we run within a group so that all the macros can be forgotten when we are done
+    \long\def\thanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \thanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height
+    \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height
+    \normalfont\normalsize% we declare more descriptive variable names
+    \let\@IEEEmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%height of the main text columns
+    \let\@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%height of the main text columns with integer # lines
+    % set the nominal and minimum values for the title spacer
+    % the dynamic algorithm will not allow the spacer size to
+    % become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be
+    % lengthened
+    % default to journal values
+    \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip}%
+    \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip}%
+    % conferences and technotes need tighter spacing
+    \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%conference
+     \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}%
+     \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}%
+    \fi
+    \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%technote
+      \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}%
+      \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}%
+    \fi%
+    % get the height that the title will take up
+    \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
+       \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}}%
+    \else
+       \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@maketitle}}%
+    \fi
+    \@IEEEmaintextheight=-\@IEEEmaintextheight% title takes away from maintext, so reverse sign
+    % add the height of the page textheight
+    \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by \textheight%
+    % correct for title pages using pubid
+    \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
+       % peerreview papers use the pubid on the cover page only.
+       % And the cover page uses a static spacer.
+       \if@IEEEusingpubid\advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEpubidpullup\fi
+    \fi%
+    % subtract off the nominal value of the title bottom spacer
+    \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEENORMtitlevspace%
+    % \topskip takes away some too
+    \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\topskip%
+    % calculate the column height of the main text for lines
+    % now we calculate the main text height as if holding
+    % an integer number of \normalsize lines after the first
+    % and discard any excess fractional remainder
+    % we subtracted the first line, because the first line
+    % is placed \topskip into the maintext, not \baselineskip like the
+    % rest of the lines.
+    \@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEmaintextheight%
+    \divide\@IEEEINTmaintextheight  by \baselineskip%
+    \multiply\@IEEEINTmaintextheight  by \baselineskip%
+    % now we calculate how much the title spacer height will
+    % have to be reduced from nominal (\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight is always
+    % a positive value) so that the maintext area will contain an integer
+    % number of normal size lines
+    % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer
+    % need \@IEEEINTmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register
+    \let\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight=\@IEEEINTmaintextheight%
+    \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEmaintextheight%
+    \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by \baselineskip%
+    % this is the calculated height of the spacer
+    % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer
+    % need \@IEEEmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register
+    \let\@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEEmaintextheight%
+    \@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% set the nominal value
+    % we go with the reduced length if it is smaller than an increase
+    \ifdim\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight < 0.5\baselineskip\relax%
+     \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight%
+     % if the resulting spacer is too small back out and go with an increase instead
+     \ifdim\@IEEECOMPENSATElen<\@IEEEMINtitlevspace\relax%
+      \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip%
+     \fi%
+    \else%
+     % go with an increase because it is closer to the nominal than a decrease
+     \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight%
+     \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip%
+    \fi%
+    % set the calculated rigid spacer
+    \vspace{\@IEEECOMPENSATElen}}}
+
+
+
+% V1.6
+% we allow the user access to the last part of the title area
+% useful in emergencies such as when a different spacing is needed
+% This text is NOT compensated for in the dynamic sizer.
+\let\@IEEEaftertitletext=\relax
+\long\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\def\@IEEEaftertitletext{#1}}
+
+% V1.7 provide a way for users to enter abstract and keywords
+% into the onecolumn title are. This text is compensated for
+% in the dynamic sizer.
+\let\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext=\relax
+\long\def\IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext#1{\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext{#1}}
+% V1.7 provide a way for users to get the \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext if
+% not in compsoc journal mode - this way abstract and keywords can be placed
+% in their conventional position if not in compsoc mode.
+\def\IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext{%
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if compsoc conf
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi
+\else% or if not compsoc
+\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi}
+
+
+% command to allow alteration of baselinestretch, but only if the current
+% baselineskip is unity. Used to tweak the compsoc abstract and keywords line spacing.
+\def\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch#1{{\def\baselinestretch{1}\selectfont
+\global\@tempskipa\baselineskip}\ifnum\@tempskipa=\baselineskip%
+\def\baselinestretch{#1}\selectfont\fi\relax}
+
+
+% abstract and keywords are in \small, except 
+% for 9pt docs in which they are in \footnotesize
+% Because 9pt docs use an 8pt footnotesize, \small
+% becomes a rather awkward 8.5pt
+\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small}
+\ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine
+ \def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}
+\fi
+
+% compsoc journals use \footnotesize, compsoc conferences use normalsize
+\@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}}
+%\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\normalsize}}
+
+
+
+
+% V1.6 have abstract and keywords strip leading spaces, pars and newlines
+% so that spacing is more tightly controlled.
+\def\abstract{\normalfont
+    \if@twocolumn
+      \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\abstractname}---\relax
+    \else
+      \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
+    \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
+% V1.6 IEEE wants only 1 pica from end of abstract to introduction heading when in 
+% conference mode (the heading already has this much above it)
+\def\endabstract{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace{1.34ex}\fi\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi
+    \normalfont\normalsize}
+
+\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont
+    \if@twocolumn
+      \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}-\relax
+    \else
+      \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize
+    \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
+\def\endIEEEkeywords{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace{0.67ex}\fi
+    \par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi%
+    \normalfont\normalsize}
+
+% V1.7 compsoc keywords index terms
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+  \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference
+\def\abstract{\normalfont
+      \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\abstractname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip
+      \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
+      \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
+\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\vskip 1.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip
+      \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip
+      \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
+      \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
+  \else% compsoc not conference
+\def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily
+    \if@twocolumn
+      \@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textbf{\abstractname}---\relax
+    \else
+      \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
+    \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
+\def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily
+    \if@twocolumn
+      \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent
+      \textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax
+    \else
+      \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize%
+    \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}
+  \fi
+\fi
+
+
+
+% gobbles all leading \, \\ and \par, upon finding first token that
+% is not a \ , \\ or a \par, it ceases and returns that token
+% 
+% used to strip leading \, \\ and \par from the input
+% so that such things in the beginning of an environment will not
+% affect the formatting of the text
+\long\def\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP#1{\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=0%
+\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken#1%
+\let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken=\par%
+\let\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken=\\%
+\let\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken=\ %
+\def\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO{\ }%
+\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken%
+\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
+\fi%
+\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken%
+\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
+\fi%
+\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken%
+\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
+\fi%
+% a control space will come in as a macro
+% when it is the last one on a line
+\ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO%
+\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1%
+\fi%
+% if we have to swallow this token, do so and taste the next one
+% else spit it out and stop gobbling
+\ifx\@IEEEswallowthistoken 1\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP\else%
+\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=#1\fi%
+\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP}%
+
+
+
+
+% TITLING OF SECTIONS
+\def\@IEEEsectpunct{:\ \,}  % Punctuation after run-in section heading  (headings which are
+                            % part of the paragraphs), need little bit more than a single space
+                            % spacing from section number to title
+% compsoc conferences use regular period/space punctuation
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
+\def\@IEEEsectpunct{.\ }
+\fi\fi
+
+
+\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 0.5em\relax}
+
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+% compsoc journals need extra spacing
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else
+\def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 1em\relax}
+\fi\fi
+
+%v1.7 put {} after #6 to allow for some types of user font control
+%and use \@@par rather than \par
+\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
+  \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
+     \let\@svsec\@empty
+  \else
+     \refstepcounter{#1}%
+     % load section label and spacer into \@svsec
+     \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%
+  \fi%
+  \@tempskipa #5\relax
+  \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@% tempskipa determines whether is treated as a high
+     \begingroup #6{\relax% or low level heading
+      \noindent % subsections are NOT indented
+       % print top level headings. \@svsec is label, #8 is heading title
+       % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal
+       {\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}}%
+     \endgroup
+     \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else
+               \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}%
+  \else % printout low level headings
+     % svsechd seems to swallow the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{}
+     % got rid of sectionmark stuff
+     \def\@svsechd{#6{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec #8\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}%
+     \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else
+               \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}}%
+  \fi%skip down
+  \@xsect{#5}}
+
+
+% section* handler
+%v1.7 put {} after #4 to allow for some types of user font control
+%and use \@@par rather than \par
+\def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\@tempskipa #3\relax
+  \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
+     %\begingroup #4\@hangfrom{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\par}\endgroup
+     % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal
+     \begingroup \noindent #4{\relax{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}}\endgroup
+  % svsechd swallows the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{}
+  \else \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}}\fi
+  \@xsect{#3}}
+
+
+%% SECTION heading spacing and font
+%%
+% arguments are: #1 - sectiontype name
+% (for \@sect)   #2 - section level
+%                #3 - section heading indent
+%                #4 - top separation (absolute value used, neg indicates not to indent main text)
+%                     If negative, make stretch parts negative too!
+%                #5 - (absolute value used) positive: bottom separation after heading,
+%                      negative: amount to indent main text after heading
+%                Both #4 and #5 negative means to indent main text and use negative top separation
+%                #6 - font control
+% You've got to have \normalfont\normalsize in the font specs below to prevent
+% trouble when you do something like:
+% \section{Note}{\ttfamily TT-TEXT} is known to ... 
+% IEEE sometimes REALLY stretches the area before a section
+% heading by up to about 0.5in. However, it may not be a good
+% idea to let LaTeX have quite this much rubber.
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
+% IEEE wants section heading spacing to decrease for conference mode
+\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}%
+{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}%
+\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}%
+{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
+\else % for journals
+\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{3.0ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% V1.6 3.0ex from 3.5ex
+{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}%
+\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}%
+{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
+\fi
+
+% for both journals and conferences
+% decided to put in a little rubber above the section, might help somebody
+\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
+{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
+\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
+{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}%
+
+
+% compsoc
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
+% compsoc conference
+\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
+{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\large\bfseries}}%
+\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
+{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\sublargesize\bfseries}}%
+\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}%
+{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}%
+\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}%
+{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}%
+\else% compsoc journals
+% use negative top separation as compsoc journals do not indent paragraphs after section titles
+\def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}%
+{0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\large\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}%
+% Note that subsection and smaller may not be correct for the Computer Society,
+% I have to look up an example.
+\def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -1.5ex}%
+{0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries}}%
+\def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2.5ex plus -1ex minus -1ex}%
+{0.5ex plus 0.5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\itshape}}%
+\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{-0ex plus -0.1ex minus -0.1ex}%
+{0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}%
+\fi\fi
+
+
+
+
+%% ENVIRONMENTS
+% "box" symbols at end of proofs
+\def\IEEEQEDclosed{\mbox{\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{1.3ex}}} % for a filled box
+% V1.6 some journals use an open box instead that will just fit around a closed one
+\def\IEEEQEDopen{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.2pt}\fbox{\rule[0pt]{0pt}{1.3ex}\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{0pt}}}}
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDopen}   % default to open for compsoc
+\else
+\def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDclosed} % otherwise default to closed
+\fi
+
+% v1.7 name change to avoid namespace collision with amsthm. Also add support
+% for an optional argument.
+\def\IEEEproof{\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEproof}{\@IEEEproof[\IEEEproofname]}}
+\def\@IEEEproof[#1]{\par\noindent\hspace{2em}{\itshape #1: }}
+\def\endIEEEproof{\hspace*{\fill}~\IEEEQED\par}
+
+
+%\itemindent is set to \z@ by list, so define new temporary variable
+\newdimen\@IEEEtmpitemindent
+\def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily\trivlist%
+    \item[\hskip \labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2:}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent}
+\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily \trivlist%
+% V1.6 IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics
+% Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this.
+    \item[\hskip\labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2\ (#3):}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent}
+% V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with
+% lines below.
+\def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist}
+
+% V1.6
+% display command for the section the theorem is in - so that \thesection
+% is not used as this will be in Roman numerals when we want arabic.
+% LaTeX2e uses \def\@thmcounter#1{\noexpand\arabic{#1}} for the theorem number
+% (second part) display and \def\@thmcountersep{.} as a separator.
+% V1.7 intercept calls to the section counter and reroute to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection
+% to allow \appendix(ices} to override as needed.
+%
+% special handler for sections, allows appendix(ices) to override
+\gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection#1{\arabic{#1}}
+% string macro
+\edef\@IEEEstringsection{section}
+
+% redefine the #1#2[#3] form of newtheorem to use a hook to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection
+% if section in_counter is used
+\def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{%
+  \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname
+    {\@definecounter{#1}\@newctr{#1}[#3]%
+     \edef\@IEEEstringtmp{#3}
+     \ifx\@IEEEstringtmp\@IEEEstringsection
+     \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{%
+     \noexpand\@IEEEthmcounterinsection{#3}\@thmcountersep
+          \@thmcounter{#1}}%
+     \else
+     \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{%
+       \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep
+          \@thmcounter{#1}}%
+     \fi
+     \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}%
+     \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}
+
+
+
+%% SET UP THE DEFAULT PAGESTYLE
+\ps@headings
+\pagenumbering{arabic}
+
+% normally the page counter starts at 1
+\setcounter{page}{1}
+% however, for peerreview the cover sheet is page 0 or page -1
+% (for duplex printing)
+\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview
+   \if@twoside
+      \setcounter{page}{-1}
+   \else
+      \setcounter{page}{0}
+   \fi
+\fi
+
+% standard book class behavior - let bottom line float up and down as
+% needed when single sided
+\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside\else\raggedbottom\fi
+% if two column - turn on twocolumn, allow word spacings to stretch more and
+% enforce a rigid position for the last lines
+\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn
+% the peer review option delays invoking twocolumn
+   \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
+      \twocolumn
+   \fi
+\sloppy 
+\flushbottom
+\fi
+
+
+
+
+% \APPENDIX and \APPENDICES definitions
+
+% This is the \@ifmtarg command from the LaTeX ifmtarg package
+% by Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau
+% \@ifmtarg is used to determine if an argument to a command
+% is present or not.
+% For instance:
+% \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{empty}}{\typeout{has something}}
+% \@ifmtarg is used with our redefined \section command if
+% \appendices is invoked.
+% The command \section will behave slightly differently depending
+% on whether the user specifies a title: 
+% \section{My appendix title}
+% or not:
+% \section{}
+% This way, we can eliminate the blank lines where the title
+% would be, and the unneeded : after Appendix in the table of
+% contents 
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\Q=3
+\long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil}
+\long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4}
+\endgroup
+% end of \@ifmtarg defs
+
+
+% V1.7
+% command that allows the one time saving of the original definition
+% of section to \@IEEEappendixsavesection for \appendix or \appendices 
+% we don't save \section here as it may be redefined later by other
+% packages (hyperref.sty, etc.)
+\def\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce{\let\@IEEEappendixsavesection\section
+\let\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\relax}
+
+% neat trick to grab and process the argument from \section{argument}
+% we process differently if the user invoked \section{} with no
+% argument (title)
+% note we reroute the call to the old \section*
+\def\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument#1{%
+\@ifmtarg{#1}{%
+\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis}%
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection}}{%
+\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis \\* #1}%
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection: #1}}}
+
+% we use this if the user calls \section{} after
+% \appendix-- which has no meaning. So, we ignore the
+% command and its argument. Then, warn the user.
+\def\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument#1{\typeout{** WARNING: Ignoring useless
+\protect\section\space in Appendix (line \the\inputlineno).}}
+
+
+% remember \thesection forms will be displayed in \ref calls
+% and in the Table of Contents.
+% The \sectiondis form is used in the actual heading itself
+
+% appendix command for one single appendix
+% normally has no heading. However, if you want a 
+% heading, you can do so via the optional argument:
+% \appendix[Optional Heading]
+\def\appendix{\relax}
+\renewcommand{\appendix}[1][]{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par
+    % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique
+    \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.A}%
+    % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section
+    \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}%
+    \setcounter{section}{0}%
+    \setcounter{subsection}{0}%
+    \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}%
+    \setcounter{paragraph}{0}%
+    \gdef\thesection{A}%
+    \gdef\thesectiondis{}% 
+    \gdef\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}}%
+    \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A}
+    \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter
+    \@ifmtarg{#1}{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname}%
+                  \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname}}{%
+             \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\\* #1}%
+             \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname: #1}}%
+    % redefine \section command for appendix
+    % leave \section* as is
+    \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{%
+                    \@IEEEdestroythesectionargument}}% throw out the argument
+                                                     % of the normal form
+}
+
+
+
+% appendices command for multiple appendices
+% user then calls \section with an argument (possibly empty) to
+% declare the individual appendices
+\def\appendices{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par
+    % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique
+    \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.\Alph{section}}%
+    % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section
+    \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}%
+    \setcounter{section}{-1}% we want \refstepcounter to use section 0
+    \setcounter{subsection}{0}%
+    \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}%
+    \setcounter{paragraph}{0}%
+    \ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices%
+    \gdef\thesection{\Roman{section}}%
+    \gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}}%
+    \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}.}}%
+    \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A\arabic{##1}}
+    \else%
+    \gdef\thesection{\Alph{section}}%
+    \gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}}%
+    \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}.}}%
+    \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{\Alph{##1}}
+    \fi%
+    \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter
+    \setcounter{section}{0}% NEXT \section will be the FIRST appendix
+    % redefine \section command for appendices
+    % leave \section* as is
+    \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% process the *-form
+                    \refstepcounter{section}% or is a new section so,
+                    \@IEEEprocessthesectionargument}}% process the argument 
+                                                 % of the normal form
+}
+
+
+
+% \IEEEPARstart
+% Definition for the big two line drop cap letter at the beginning of the
+% first paragraph of journal papers. The first argument is the first letter
+% of the first word, the second argument is the remaining letters of the
+% first word which will be rendered in upper case.
+% In V1.6 this has been completely rewritten to:
+% 
+% 1. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment
+%    within the paragraph that uses \IEEEPARstart.
+% 2. auto-detect and use the current font family
+% 3. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that
+%    interword glue will now work as normal.
+% 4. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines.
+% 
+% We generalize things via control macros - playing with these is fun too.
+% 
+% V1.7 added more control macros to make it easy for IEEEtrantools.sty users
+% to change the font style.
+% 
+% the number of lines that are indented to clear it
+% may need to increase if using decenders
+\def\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES{2}
+% minimum number of lines left on a page to allow a \@IEEEPARstart
+% Does not take into consideration rubber shrink, so it tends to
+% be overly cautious
+\def\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES{2}
+% V1.7 the height of the drop cap is adjusted to match the height of this text
+% in the current font (when \IEEEPARstart is called).
+\def\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT{T}
+% the depth the letter is lowered below the baseline
+% the height (and size) of the letter is determined by the sum
+% of this value and the height of the \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current
+% font. It is a good idea to set this value in terms of the baselineskip
+% so that it can respond to changes therein.
+\def\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH{1.1\baselineskip}
+% V1.7 the font the drop cap will be rendered in,
+% can take zero or one argument.
+\def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\bfseries}
+% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify
+% the drop cap letter, can take zero or one argument.
+\def\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase}
+% V1.7 the font that will be used to render the rest of the word,
+% can take zero or one argument.
+\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\relax}
+% V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify
+% the rest of the word, can take zero or one argument.
+\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase}
+% This is the horizontal separation distance from the drop letter to the main text.
+% Lengths that depend on the font (e.g., ex, em, etc.) will be referenced
+% to the font that is active when \IEEEPARstart is called. 
+\def\@IEEEPARstartSEP{0.15em}
+% V1.7 horizontal offset applied to the left of the drop cap.
+\def\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET{0em}
+% V1.7 Italic correction command applied at the end of the drop cap.
+\def\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT{\/}
+
+% V1.7 compoc uses nonbold drop cap and small caps word style
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+\def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\mdseries}
+\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\scshape}
+\def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\relax}
+\fi
+
+% definition of \IEEEPARstart
+% THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING AREA, DO NOT ALLOW SPACES WITHIN THESE LINES
+% 
+% The token \@IEEEPARstartfont will be globally defined after the first use
+% of \IEEEPARstart and will be a font command which creates the big letter
+% The first argument is the first letter of the first word and the second
+% argument is the rest of the first word(s).
+\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{\par{%
+% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start
+% on a new one
+\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES\baselineskip}{\relax}%
+% V1.7 move this up here in case user uses \textbf for \@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE
+% which uses command \leavevmode which causes an unwanted \indent to be issued
+\noindent
+% calculate the desired height of the big letter
+% it extends from the top of \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current font
+% down to \@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH below the current baseline
+\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}%
+\addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}%
+% extract the name of the current font in bold
+% and place it in \@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME
+\def\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD##1 ##2\relax{##1}%
+{\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\selectfont\edef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE{\fontname\font\space}%
+\xdef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME{\expandafter\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE\relax}}}%
+% define a font based on this name with a point size equal to the desired
+% height of the drop letter
+\font\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax%
+% save this value as a counter (integer) value (sp points)
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
+% now get the height of the actual letter produced by this font size
+\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1}}%
+% If something bogus happens like the first argument is empty or the
+% current font is strange, do not allow a zero height.
+\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0pt\relax%
+\typeout{** WARNING: IEEEPARstart drop letter has zero height! (line \the\inputlineno)}%
+\typeout{ Forcing the drop letter font size to 10pt.}%
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=10pt%
+\fi%
+% and store it as a counter
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%
+% Since a font size doesn't exactly correspond to the height of the capital
+% letters in that font, the actual height of the letter, \@IEEEtrantmpcountB,
+% will be less than that desired, \@IEEEtrantmpcountA
+% we need to raise the font size, \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA 
+% by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA / \@IEEEtrantmpcountB
+% But, TeX doesn't have floating point division, so we have to use integer
+% division. Hence the use of the counters.
+% We need to reduce the denominator so that the loss of the remainder will
+% have minimal affect on the accuracy of the result
+\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 200%
+\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountB%
+% Then reequalize things when we use TeX's ability to multiply by
+% floating point values
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0.005\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%
+\multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
+% \@IEEEPARstartfont is globaly set to the calculated font of the big letter
+% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to to create the
+% big letter.
+\global\font\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%
+% Now set \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA to the width of the big letter
+% We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to set the
+% hanging indent
+\settowidth{\global\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartfont
+\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}}}%
+% end of the isolated calculation environment
+% add in the extra clearance we want
+\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartSEP\relax%
+% add in the optional offset
+\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET\relax%
+% V1.7 don't allow negative offsets to produce negative hanging indents
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA
+\ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB < 0 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 0pt\fi
+% \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA has the width of the big letter plus the
+% separation space and \@IEEEPARstartfont is the font we need to use
+% Now, we make the letter and issue the hanging indent command
+% The letter is placed in a box of zero width and height so that other
+% text won't be displaced by it.
+\hangindent\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\hangafter=-\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES%
+\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}%
+\raisebox{-\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}[0pt][0pt]{\hspace{\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}%
+\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}%
+\hspace{\@IEEEPARstartSEP}}}%
+{\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\selectfont#2}}}}
+
+
+
+
+
+
+% determines if the space remaining on a given page is equal to or greater
+% than the specified space of argument one
+% if not, execute argument two (only if the remaining space is greater than zero)
+% and issue a \newpage
+% 
+% example: \@IEEEtranneedspace{2in}{\vfill}
+% 
+% Does not take into consideration rubber shrinkage, so it tends to
+% be overly cautious
+% Based on an example posted by Donald Arseneau
+% Note this macro uses \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB internally for calculations,
+% so DO NOT PASS \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB to this routine
+% if you need a dimen register, import with \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA instead
+\def\@IEEEtranneedspace#1#2{\penalty-100\begingroup%shield temp variable
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\pagegoal\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB-\pagetotal% space left
+\ifdim #1>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax% not enough space left
+\ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\z@\relax #2\fi%
+\newpage%
+\fi\endgroup}
+
+
+
+% IEEEbiography ENVIRONMENT
+% Allows user to enter biography leaving place for picture (adapts to font size)
+% As of V1.5, a new optional argument allows you to have a real graphic!
+% V1.5 and later also fixes the "colliding biographies" which could happen when a 
+% biography's text was shorter than the space for the photo.
+% MDS 7/2001
+% V1.6 prevent multiple biographies from making multiple TOC entries
+\newif\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade
+\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadetrue
+
+% biography counter so hyperref can jump directly to the biographies
+% and not just the previous section
+\newcounter{IEEEbiography}
+\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{0}
+
+% photo area size
+\def\@IEEEBIOphotowidth{1.0in}    % width of the biography photo area
+\def\@IEEEBIOphotodepth{1.25in}   % depth (height) of the biography photo area
+% area cleared for photo
+\def\@IEEEBIOhangwidth{1.14in}    % width cleared for the biography photo area
+\def\@IEEEBIOhangdepth{1.25in}    % depth cleared for the biography photo area
+                                  % actual depth will be a multiple of 
+                                  % \baselineskip, rounded up
+\def\@IEEEBIOskipN{4\baselineskip}% nominal value of the vskip above the biography
+
+\newenvironment{IEEEbiography}[2][]{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize%
+\unitlength 1in\parskip=0pt\par\parindent 1em\interlinepenalty500%
+% we need enough space to support the hanging indent
+% the nominal value of the spacer
+% and one extra line for good measure
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth%
+\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEBIOskipN%
+\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by 1\baselineskip%
+% if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start
+% with a new one
+\@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\relax}%
+% nominal spacer can strech, not shrink use 1fil so user can out stretch with \vfill
+\vskip \@IEEEBIOskipN plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip%
+% the default box for where the photo goes
+\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox{%
+\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ HERE \end{minipage}}}}%
+%
+% detect if the optional argument was supplied, this requires the
+% \@ifmtarg command as defined in the appendix section above
+% and if so, override the default box with what they want
+\@ifmtarg{#1}{\relax}{\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{\mbox{\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}%
+\centering%
+#1%
+\end{minipage}}}}% end if optional argument supplied
+% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before
+\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade%
+% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump
+% to the biography, not the previous section
+\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}%
+\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}%
+\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse%
+\fi%
+% one more biography
+\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
+% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents 
+\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#2}%
+% V1.6 properly handle if a new paragraph should occur while the
+% hanging indent is still active. Do this by redefining \par so
+% that it will not start a new paragraph. (But it will appear to the
+% user as if it did.) Also, strip any leading pars, newlines, or spaces.
+\let\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD=\par% save the original \par command
+\edef\par{\hfil\break\indent}% the new \par will not be a "real" \par
+\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}% get height of biography box
+\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth%
+\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% countA has the hang depth
+\divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \baselineskip%  calculates lines needed to produce the hang depth
+\advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by 1% ensure we overestimate
+% set the hanging indent
+\hangindent\@IEEEBIOhangwidth%
+\hangafter-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
+% reference the top of the photo area to the top of a capital T
+\settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\mbox{T}}%
+% set the photo box, give it zero width and height so as not to disturb anything
+\noindent\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEBIOhangwidth}\raisebox{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}[0pt][0pt]{%
+\raisebox{-\@IEEEBIOphotodepth}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}}}%
+% now place the author name and begin the bio text
+\noindent\textbf{#2\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\let\par=\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD\par%
+% 7/2001 V1.5 detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo area
+% and pad the unused area - preventing a collision from the next biography entry
+% MDS
+\ifnum \prevgraf <\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax% detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo
+    \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -\prevgraf% calculate how many lines we need to pad
+    \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% we compensate for the fact that we indented an extra line
+    \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselineskip% calculate the length of the padding
+    \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA%
+    \noindent\rule{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% insert an invisible support strut
+\fi%
+\par\normalfont}
+
+
+
+% V1.6
+% added biography without a photo environment
+\newenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{%
+% Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before
+\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade%
+% link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump
+% to the biography, not the previous section
+\setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}%
+\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
+\addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}%
+\global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse%
+\fi%
+% one more biography
+\refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}%
+% Make an entry for this name into the table of contents 
+\addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#1}%
+\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize\interlinepenalty500%
+\vskip 4\baselineskip plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip%
+\parskip=0pt\par%
+\noindent\textbf{#1\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\par\normalfont}
+
+
+% provide the user with some old font commands
+% got this from article.cls
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl}
+\DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal}
+
+
+% SPECIAL PAPER NOTICE COMMANDS
+% 
+% holds the special notice text
+\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{\relax}
+ 
+% for special papers, like invited papers, the user can do:
+% \IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} before \maketitle
+\def\IEEEspecialpapernotice#1{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference%
+\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\sublargesize\textit{#1}\vspace*{1em}}}%
+\else%
+\def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\\*[1.5ex]\sublargesize\textit{#1}}\vspace*{-2ex}}%
+\fi}
+
+
+
+
+% PUBLISHER ID COMMANDS
+% to insert a publisher's ID footer
+% V1.6 \IEEEpubid has been changed so that the change in page size and style
+% occurs in \maketitle. \IEEEpubid must now be issued prior to \maketitle
+% use \IEEEpubidadjcol as before - in the second column of the title page
+% These changes allow \maketitle to take the reduced page height into
+% consideration when dynamically setting the space between the author 
+% names and the maintext.
+%
+% the amount the main text is pulled up to make room for the
+% publisher's ID footer
+% IEEE uses about 1.3\baselineskip for journals, 
+% dynamic title spacing will clean up the fraction
+\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{1.3\baselineskip}
+\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
+% for technotes it must be an integer of baselineskip as there can be no
+% dynamic title spacing for two column mode technotes (the title is in the
+% in first column) and we should maintain an integer number of lines in the
+% second column
+% There are some examples (such as older issues of "Transactions on
+% Information Theory") in which IEEE really pulls the text off the ID for
+% technotes - about 0.55in (or 4\baselineskip). We'll use 2\baselineskip
+% and call it even.
+\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{2\baselineskip}
+\fi
+
+% V1.7 compsoc does not use a pullup
+\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc
+\def\@IEEEpubidpullup{0pt}
+\fi
+
+% holds the ID text
+\def\@IEEEpubid{\relax}
+
+% flag so \maketitle can tell if \IEEEpubid was called
+\newif\if@IEEEusingpubid
+\global\@IEEEusingpubidfalse
+% issue this command in the page to have the ID at the bottom
+% V1.6 use before \maketitle
+\def\IEEEpubid#1{\def\@IEEEpubid{#1}\global\@IEEEusingpubidtrue}
+
+
+% command which will pull up (shorten) the column it is executed in
+% to make room for the publisher ID. Place in the second column of
+% the title page when using \IEEEpubid
+% Is smart enough not to do anything when in single column text or
+% if the user hasn't called \IEEEpubid
+% currently needed in for the second column of a page with the
+% publisher ID. If not needed in future releases, please provide this
+% command and define it as \relax for backward compatibility
+% v1.6b do not allow command to operate if the peer review option has been 
+% selected because \IEEEpubidadjcol will not be on the cover page.
+% V1.7 do nothing if compsoc
+\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else
+\if@twocolumn\if@IEEEusingpubid\enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}\fi\fi\fi\fi}
+
+% Special thanks to Peter Wilson, Daniel Luecking, and the other
+% gurus at comp.text.tex, for helping me to understand how best to
+% implement the IEEEpubid command in LaTeX.
+
+
+
+%% Lockout some commands under various conditions
+
+% general purpose bit bucket
+\newsavebox{\@IEEEtranrubishbin}
+
+% flags to prevent multiple warning messages
+\newif\if@IEEEWARNthanks
+\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart
+\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography
+\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto
+\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid
+\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol
+\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership
+\newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext
+\@IEEEWARNthankstrue
+\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstarttrue
+\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographytrue
+\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophototrue
+\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidtrue
+\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcoltrue
+\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershiptrue
+\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletexttrue
+
+
+%% Lockout some commands when in various modes, but allow them to be restored if needed
+%%
+% save commands which might be locked out
+% so that the user can later restore them if needed
+\let\@IEEESAVECMDthanks\thanks
+\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart\IEEEPARstart
+\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography\IEEEbiography
+\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography\endIEEEbiography
+\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto\IEEEbiographynophoto
+\let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto\endIEEEbiographynophoto
+\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid\IEEEpubid
+\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol\IEEEpubidadjcol
+\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership\IEEEmembership
+\let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext\IEEEaftertitletext
+
+
+% disable \IEEEPARstart when in draft mode
+% This may have originally been done because the pre-V1.6 drop letter
+% algorithm had problems with a non-unity baselinestretch
+% At any rate, it seems too formal to have a drop letter in a draft
+% paper.
+\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls
+\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** ATTENTION: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
+ is disabled in draft mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
+\fi
+% and for technotes
+\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote
+\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
+ is locked out for technotes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
+\fi
+
+
+% lockout unneeded commands when in conference mode
+\ifCLASSOPTIONconference
+% when locked out, \thanks, \IEEEbiography, \IEEEbiographynophoto, \IEEEpubid,
+% \IEEEmembership and \IEEEaftertitletext will all swallow their given text. 
+% \IEEEPARstart will output a normal character instead
+% warn the user about these commands only once to prevent the console screen
+% from filling up with redundant messages
+\def\thanks#1{\if@IEEEWARNthanks\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\thanks
+ is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNthanksfalse}
+\def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart
+ is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse}
+
+
+% LaTeX treats environments and commands with optional arguments differently.
+% the actual ("internal") command is stored as \\commandname 
+% (accessed via \csname\string\commandname\endcsname )
+% the "external" command \commandname is a macro with code to determine
+% whether or not the optional argument is presented and to provide the 
+% default if it is absent. So, in order to save and restore such a command
+% we would have to save and restore \\commandname as well. But, if LaTeX
+% ever changes the way it names the internal names, the trick would break.
+% Instead let us just define a new environment so that the internal
+% name can be left undisturbed.
+\newenvironment{@IEEEbogusbiography}[2][]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiography
+ is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographyfalse%
+\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax}
+% and make biography point to our bogus biography
+\let\IEEEbiography=\@IEEEbogusbiography
+\let\endIEEEbiography=\end@IEEEbogusbiography
+
+\renewenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiographynophoto
+ is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophotofalse%
+\setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax}
+
+\def\IEEEpubid#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubid 
+ is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidfalse}
+\def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubidadjcol
+ is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcolfalse}
+\def\IEEEmembership#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEmembership
+ is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershipfalse}
+\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEaftertitletext
+ is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletextfalse}
+\fi
+
+
+% provide a way to restore the commands that are locked out
+\def\IEEEoverridecommandlockouts{%
+\typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding command lockouts (line \the\inputlineno).}%
+\let\thanks\@IEEESAVECMDthanks%
+\let\IEEEPARstart\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart%
+\let\IEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography%
+\let\endIEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography%
+\let\IEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto%
+\let\endIEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto%
+\let\IEEEpubid\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid%
+\let\IEEEpubidadjcol\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol%
+\let\IEEEmembership\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership%
+\let\IEEEaftertitletext\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext}
+
+
+
+% need a backslash character for typeout output
+{\catcode`\|=0 \catcode`\\=12
+|xdef|@IEEEbackslash{\}}
+
+
+% hook to allow easy disabling of all legacy warnings
+\def\@IEEElegacywarn#1#2{\typeout{** ATTENTION: \@IEEEbackslash #1 is deprecated (line \the\inputlineno).
+Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}}
+
+
+% provide for legacy commands
+\def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA}
+\def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN}
+\def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark}
+\def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart}
+\def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid}
+\def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol}
+\def\QED{\@IEEElegacywarn{QED}{IEEEQED}\IEEEQED}
+\def\QEDclosed{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDclosed}{IEEEQEDclosed}\IEEEQEDclosed}
+\def\QEDopen{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDopen}{IEEEQEDopen}\IEEEQEDopen}
+\def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice}
+
+
+
+% provide for legacy environments
+\def\biography{\@IEEElegacywarn{biography}{IEEEbiography}\IEEEbiography}
+\def\biographynophoto{\@IEEElegacywarn{biographynophoto}{IEEEbiographynophoto}\IEEEbiographynophoto}
+\def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords}
+\def\endbiography{\endIEEEbiography}
+\def\endbiographynophoto{\endIEEEbiographynophoto}
+\def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords}
+
+
+% provide for legacy IED commands/lengths when possible
+\let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent
+\def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin}
+\def\setlabelwidth{\@IEEElegacywarn{setlabelwidth}{IEEEsetlabelwidth}\IEEEsetlabelwidth}
+\def\usemathlabelsep{\@IEEElegacywarn{usemathlabelsep}{IEEEusemathlabelsep}\IEEEusemathlabelsep}
+\def\iedlabeljustifyc{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyc}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}
+\def\iedlabeljustifyl{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyl}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}
+\def\iedlabeljustifyr{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyr}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}
+
+
+
+% let \proof use the IEEEtran version even after amsthm is loaded
+% \proof is now deprecated in favor of \IEEEproof
+\AtBeginDocument{\def\proof{\@IEEElegacywarn{proof}{IEEEproof}\IEEEproof}\def\endproof{\endIEEEproof}}
+
+% V1.7 \overrideIEEEmargins is no longer supported.
+\def\overrideIEEEmargins{%
+\typeout{** WARNING: \string\overrideIEEEmargins \space no longer supported (line \the\inputlineno).}%
+\typeout{** Use the \string\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin, \string\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin \space controls instead.}}
+
+
+\endinput
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of IEEEtran.cls  %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+% That's all folks!
+
diff -r 00ac265b251b -r 02b6fab379ba Journal/document/llncs.cls
--- /dev/null	Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
+++ b/Journal/document/llncs.cls	Sat Jul 27 08:17:54 2013 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,1189 @@
+% LLNCS DOCUMENT CLASS -- version 2.13 (28-Jan-2002)
+% Springer Verlag LaTeX2e support for Lecture Notes in Computer Science
+%
+%%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%%
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1995/12/01]
+\ProvidesClass{llncs}[2002/01/28 v2.13
+^^J LaTeX document class for Lecture Notes in Computer Science]
+% Options
+\let\if@envcntreset\iffalse
+\DeclareOption{envcountreset}{\let\if@envcntreset\iftrue}
+\DeclareOption{citeauthoryear}{\let\citeauthoryear=Y}
+\DeclareOption{oribibl}{\let\oribibl=Y}
+\let\if@custvec\iftrue
+\DeclareOption{orivec}{\let\if@custvec\iffalse}
+\let\if@envcntsame\iffalse
+\DeclareOption{envcountsame}{\let\if@envcntsame\iftrue}
+\let\if@envcntsect\iffalse
+\DeclareOption{envcountsect}{\let\if@envcntsect\iftrue}
+\let\if@runhead\iffalse
+\DeclareOption{runningheads}{\let\if@runhead\iftrue}
+
+\let\if@openbib\iffalse
+\DeclareOption{openbib}{\let\if@openbib\iftrue}
+
+% languages
+\let\switcht@@therlang\relax
+\def\ds@deutsch{\def\switcht@@therlang{\switcht@deutsch}}
+\def\ds@francais{\def\switcht@@therlang{\switcht@francais}}
+
+\DeclareOption*{\PassOptionsToClass{\CurrentOption}{article}}
+
+\ProcessOptions
+
+\LoadClass[twoside]{article}
+\RequirePackage{multicol} % needed for the list of participants, index
+
+\setlength{\textwidth}{12.2cm}
+\setlength{\textheight}{19.3cm}
+\renewcommand\@pnumwidth{2em}
+\renewcommand\@tocrmarg{3.5em}
+%
+\def\@dottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{%
+  \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth \else
+    \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@
+    {\leftskip #2\relax \rightskip \@tocrmarg \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 2cm
+               \parfillskip -\rightskip \pretolerance=10000
+     \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue
+     \interlinepenalty\@M
+     \leavevmode
+     \@tempdima #3\relax
+     \advance\leftskip \@tempdima \null\nobreak\hskip -\leftskip
+     {#4}\nobreak
+     \leaders\hbox{$\m@th
+        \mkern \@dotsep mu\hbox{.}\mkern \@dotsep
+        mu$}\hfill
+     \nobreak
+     \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil\normalfont \normalcolor #5}%
+     \par}%
+  \fi}
+%
+\def\switcht@albion{%
+\def\abstractname{Abstract.}
+\def\ackname{Acknowledgement.}
+\def\andname{and}
+\def\lastandname{\unskip, and}
+\def\appendixname{Appendix}
+\def\chaptername{Chapter}
+\def\claimname{Claim}
+\def\conjecturename{Conjecture}
+\def\contentsname{Table of Contents}
+\def\corollaryname{Corollary}
+\def\definitionname{Definition}
+\def\examplename{Example}
+\def\exercisename{Exercise}
+\def\figurename{Fig.}
+\def\keywordname{{\bf Key words:}}
+\def\indexname{Index}
+\def\lemmaname{Lemma}
+\def\contriblistname{List of Contributors}
+\def\listfigurename{List of Figures}
+\def\listtablename{List of Tables}
+\def\mailname{{\it Correspondence to\/}:}
+\def\noteaddname{Note added in proof}
+\def\notename{Note}
+\def\partname{Part}
+\def\problemname{Problem}
+\def\proofname{Proof}
+\def\propertyname{Property}
+\def\propositionname{Proposition}
+\def\questionname{Question}
+\def\remarkname{Remark}
+\def\seename{see}
+\def\solutionname{Solution}
+\def\subclassname{{\it Subject Classifications\/}:}
+\def\tablename{Table}
+\def\theoremname{Theorem}}
+\switcht@albion
+% Names of theorem like environments are already defined
+% but must be translated if another language is chosen
+%
+% French section
+\def\switcht@francais{%\typeout{On parle francais.}%
+ \def\abstractname{R\'esum\'e.}%
+ \def\ackname{Remerciements.}%
+ \def\andname{et}%
+ \def\lastandname{ et}%
+ \def\appendixname{Appendice}
+ \def\chaptername{Chapitre}%
+ \def\claimname{Pr\'etention}%
+ \def\conjecturename{Hypoth\`ese}%
+ \def\contentsname{Table des mati\`eres}%
+ \def\corollaryname{Corollaire}%
+ \def\definitionname{D\'efinition}%
+ \def\examplename{Exemple}%
+ \def\exercisename{Exercice}%
+ \def\figurename{Fig.}%
+ \def\keywordname{{\bf Mots-cl\'e:}}
+ \def\indexname{Index}
+ \def\lemmaname{Lemme}%
+ \def\contriblistname{Liste des contributeurs}
+ \def\listfigurename{Liste des figures}%
+ \def\listtablename{Liste des tables}%
+ \def\mailname{{\it Correspondence to\/}:}
+ \def\noteaddname{Note ajout\'ee \`a l'\'epreuve}%
+ \def\notename{Remarque}%
+ \def\partname{Partie}%
+ \def\problemname{Probl\`eme}%
+ \def\proofname{Preuve}%
+ \def\propertyname{Caract\'eristique}%
+%\def\propositionname{Proposition}%
+ \def\questionname{Question}%
+ \def\remarkname{Remarque}%
+ \def\seename{voir}
+ \def\solutionname{Solution}%
+ \def\subclassname{{\it Subject Classifications\/}:}
+ \def\tablename{Tableau}%
+ \def\theoremname{Th\'eor\`eme}%
+}
+%
+% German section
+\def\switcht@deutsch{%\typeout{Man spricht deutsch.}%
+ \def\abstractname{Zusammenfassung.}%
+ \def\ackname{Danksagung.}%
+ \def\andname{und}%
+ \def\lastandname{ und}%
+ \def\appendixname{Anhang}%
+ \def\chaptername{Kapitel}%
+ \def\claimname{Behauptung}%
+ \def\conjecturename{Hypothese}%
+ \def\contentsname{Inhaltsverzeichnis}%
+ \def\corollaryname{Korollar}%
+%\def\definitionname{Definition}%
+ \def\examplename{Beispiel}%
+ \def\exercisename{\"Ubung}%
+ \def\figurename{Abb.}%
+ \def\keywordname{{\bf Schl\"usselw\"orter:}}
+ \def\indexname{Index}
+%\def\lemmaname{Lemma}%
+ \def\contriblistname{Mitarbeiter}
+ \def\listfigurename{Abbildungsverzeichnis}%
+ \def\listtablename{Tabellenverzeichnis}%
+ \def\mailname{{\it Correspondence to\/}:}
+ \def\noteaddname{Nachtrag}%
+ \def\notename{Anmerkung}%
+ \def\partname{Teil}%
+%\def\problemname{Problem}%
+ \def\proofname{Beweis}%
+ \def\propertyname{Eigenschaft}%
+%\def\propositionname{Proposition}%
+ \def\questionname{Frage}%
+ \def\remarkname{Anmerkung}%
+ \def\seename{siehe}
+ \def\solutionname{L\"osung}%
+ \def\subclassname{{\it Subject Classifications\/}:}
+ \def\tablename{Tabelle}%
+%\def\theoremname{Theorem}%
+}
+
+% Ragged bottom for the actual page
+\def\thisbottomragged{\def\@textbottom{\vskip\z@ plus.0001fil
+\global\let\@textbottom\relax}}
+
+\renewcommand\small{%
+   \@setfontsize\small\@ixpt{11}%
+   \abovedisplayskip 8.5\p@ \@plus3\p@ \@minus4\p@
+   \abovedisplayshortskip \z@ \@plus2\p@
+   \belowdisplayshortskip 4\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus2\p@
+   \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+               \parsep 0\p@ \@plus1\p@ \@minus\p@
+               \topsep 8\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
+               \itemsep0\p@}%
+   \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip
+}
+
+\frenchspacing
+\widowpenalty=10000
+\clubpenalty=10000
+
+\setlength\oddsidemargin   {63\p@}
+\setlength\evensidemargin  {63\p@}
+\setlength\marginparwidth  {90\p@}
+
+\setlength\headsep   {16\p@}
+
+\setlength\footnotesep{7.7\p@}
+\setlength\textfloatsep{8mm\@plus 2\p@ \@minus 4\p@}
+\setlength\intextsep   {8mm\@plus 2\p@ \@minus 2\p@}
+
+\setcounter{secnumdepth}{2}
+
+\newcounter {chapter}
+\renewcommand\thechapter      {\@arabic\c@chapter}
+
+\newif\if@mainmatter \@mainmattertrue
+\newcommand\frontmatter{\cleardoublepage
+            \@mainmatterfalse\pagenumbering{Roman}}
+\newcommand\mainmatter{\cleardoublepage
+       \@mainmattertrue\pagenumbering{arabic}}
+\newcommand\backmatter{\if@openright\cleardoublepage\else\clearpage\fi
+      \@mainmatterfalse}
+
+\renewcommand\part{\cleardoublepage
+                 \thispagestyle{empty}%
+                 \if@twocolumn
+                     \onecolumn
+                     \@tempswatrue
+                   \else
+                     \@tempswafalse
+                 \fi
+                 \null\vfil
+                 \secdef\@part\@spart}
+
+\def\@part[#1]#2{%
+    \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+      \refstepcounter{part}%
+      \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}%
+    \else
+      \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
+    \fi
+    \markboth{}{}%
+    {\centering
+     \interlinepenalty \@M
+     \normalfont
+     \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+       \huge\bfseries \partname~\thepart
+       \par
+       \vskip 20\p@
+     \fi
+     \Huge \bfseries #2\par}%
+    \@endpart}
+\def\@spart#1{%
+    {\centering
+     \interlinepenalty \@M
+     \normalfont
+     \Huge \bfseries #1\par}%
+    \@endpart}
+\def\@endpart{\vfil\newpage
+              \if@twoside
+                \null
+                \thispagestyle{empty}%
+                \newpage
+              \fi
+              \if@tempswa
+                \twocolumn
+              \fi}
+
+\newcommand\chapter{\clearpage
+                    \thispagestyle{empty}%
+                    \global\@topnum\z@
+                    \@afterindentfalse
+                    \secdef\@chapter\@schapter}
+\def\@chapter[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+                       \if@mainmatter
+                         \refstepcounter{chapter}%
+                         \typeout{\@chapapp\space\thechapter.}%
+                         \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}%
+                                  {\protect\numberline{\thechapter}#1}%
+                       \else
+                         \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
+                       \fi
+                    \else
+                      \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
+                    \fi
+                    \chaptermark{#1}%
+                    \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
+                    \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
+                    \if@twocolumn
+                      \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
+                    \else
+                      \@makechapterhead{#2}%
+                      \@afterheading
+                    \fi}
+\def\@makechapterhead#1{%
+% \vspace*{50\p@}%
+  {\centering
+    \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+      \if@mainmatter
+        \large\bfseries \@chapapp{} \thechapter
+        \par\nobreak
+        \vskip 20\p@
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \interlinepenalty\@M
+    \Large \bfseries #1\par\nobreak
+    \vskip 40\p@
+  }}
+\def\@schapter#1{\if@twocolumn
+                   \@topnewpage[\@makeschapterhead{#1}]%
+                 \else
+                   \@makeschapterhead{#1}%
+                   \@afterheading
+                 \fi}
+\def\@makeschapterhead#1{%
+% \vspace*{50\p@}%
+  {\centering
+    \normalfont
+    \interlinepenalty\@M
+    \Large \bfseries  #1\par\nobreak
+    \vskip 40\p@
+  }}
+
+\renewcommand\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}%
+                       {-18\p@ \@plus -4\p@ \@minus -4\p@}%
+                       {12\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}%
+                       {\normalfont\large\bfseries\boldmath
+                        \rightskip=\z@ \@plus 8em\pretolerance=10000 }}
+\renewcommand\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}%
+                       {-18\p@ \@plus -4\p@ \@minus -4\p@}%
+                       {8\p@ \@plus 4\p@ \@minus 4\p@}%
+                       {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries\boldmath
+                        \rightskip=\z@ \@plus 8em\pretolerance=10000 }}
+\renewcommand\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}%
+                       {-18\p@ \@plus -4\p@ \@minus -4\p@}%
+                       {-0.5em \@plus -0.22em \@minus -0.1em}%
+                       {\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries\boldmath}}
+\renewcommand\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{\z@}%
+                       {-12\p@ \@plus -4\p@ \@minus -4\p@}%
+                       {-0.5em \@plus -0.22em \@minus -0.1em}%
+                       {\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}
+\renewcommand\subparagraph[1]{\typeout{LLNCS warning: You should not use
+                  \string\subparagraph\space with this class}\vskip0.5cm
+You should not use \verb|\subparagraph| with this class.\vskip0.5cm}
+
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Gamma}{\mathalpha}{letters}{"00}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Delta}{\mathalpha}{letters}{"01}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Theta}{\mathalpha}{letters}{"02}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Lambda}{\mathalpha}{letters}{"03}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Xi}{\mathalpha}{letters}{"04}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Pi}{\mathalpha}{letters}{"05}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Sigma}{\mathalpha}{letters}{"06}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Upsilon}{\mathalpha}{letters}{"07}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Phi}{\mathalpha}{letters}{"08}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Psi}{\mathalpha}{letters}{"09}
+\DeclareMathSymbol{\Omega}{\mathalpha}{letters}{"0A}
+
+\let\footnotesize\small
+
+\if@custvec
+\def\vec#1{\mathchoice{\mbox{\boldmath$\displaystyle#1$}}
+{\mbox{\boldmath$\textstyle#1$}}
+{\mbox{\boldmath$\scriptstyle#1$}}
+{\mbox{\boldmath$\scriptscriptstyle#1$}}}
+\fi
+
+\def\squareforqed{\hbox{\rlap{$\sqcap$}$\sqcup$}}
+\def\qed{\ifmmode\squareforqed\else{\unskip\nobreak\hfil
+\penalty50\hskip1em\null\nobreak\hfil\squareforqed
+\parfillskip=0pt\finalhyphendemerits=0\endgraf}\fi}
+
+\def\getsto{\mathrel{\mathchoice {\vcenter{\offinterlineskip
+\halign{\hfil
+$\displaystyle##$\hfil\cr\gets\cr\to\cr}}}
+{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\textstyle##$\hfil\cr\gets
+\cr\to\cr}}}
+{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptstyle##$\hfil\cr\gets
+\cr\to\cr}}}
+{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptscriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
+\gets\cr\to\cr}}}}}
+\def\lid{\mathrel{\mathchoice {\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil
+$\displaystyle##$\hfil\cr<\cr\noalign{\vskip1.2pt}=\cr}}}
+{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\textstyle##$\hfil\cr<\cr
+\noalign{\vskip1.2pt}=\cr}}}
+{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptstyle##$\hfil\cr<\cr
+\noalign{\vskip1pt}=\cr}}}
+{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptscriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
+<\cr
+\noalign{\vskip0.9pt}=\cr}}}}}
+\def\gid{\mathrel{\mathchoice {\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil
+$\displaystyle##$\hfil\cr>\cr\noalign{\vskip1.2pt}=\cr}}}
+{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\textstyle##$\hfil\cr>\cr
+\noalign{\vskip1.2pt}=\cr}}}
+{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptstyle##$\hfil\cr>\cr
+\noalign{\vskip1pt}=\cr}}}
+{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptscriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
+>\cr
+\noalign{\vskip0.9pt}=\cr}}}}}
+\def\grole{\mathrel{\mathchoice {\vcenter{\offinterlineskip
+\halign{\hfil
+$\displaystyle##$\hfil\cr>\cr\noalign{\vskip-1pt}<\cr}}}
+{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\textstyle##$\hfil\cr
+>\cr\noalign{\vskip-1pt}<\cr}}}
+{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
+>\cr\noalign{\vskip-0.8pt}<\cr}}}
+{\vcenter{\offinterlineskip\halign{\hfil$\scriptscriptstyle##$\hfil\cr
+>\cr\noalign{\vskip-0.3pt}<\cr}}}}}
+\def\bbbr{{\rm I\!R}} %reelle Zahlen
+\def\bbbm{{\rm I\!M}}
+\def\bbbn{{\rm I\!N}} %natuerliche Zahlen
+\def\bbbf{{\rm I\!F}}
+\def\bbbh{{\rm I\!H}}
+\def\bbbk{{\rm I\!K}}
+\def\bbbp{{\rm I\!P}}
+\def\bbbone{{\mathchoice {\rm 1\mskip-4mu l} {\rm 1\mskip-4mu l}
+{\rm 1\mskip-4.5mu l} {\rm 1\mskip-5mu l}}}
+\def\bbbc{{\mathchoice {\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\rm C$}\hbox{\hbox
+to0pt{\kern0.4\wd0\vrule height0.9\ht0\hss}\box0}}
+{\setbox0=\hbox{$\textstyle\rm C$}\hbox{\hbox
+to0pt{\kern0.4\wd0\vrule height0.9\ht0\hss}\box0}}
+{\setbox0=\hbox{$\scriptstyle\rm C$}\hbox{\hbox
+to0pt{\kern0.4\wd0\vrule height0.9\ht0\hss}\box0}}
+{\setbox0=\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\rm C$}\hbox{\hbox
+to0pt{\kern0.4\wd0\vrule height0.9\ht0\hss}\box0}}}}
+\def\bbbq{{\mathchoice {\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\rm
+Q$}\hbox{\raise
+0.15\ht0\hbox to0pt{\kern0.4\wd0\vrule height0.8\ht0\hss}\box0}}
+{\setbox0=\hbox{$\textstyle\rm Q$}\hbox{\raise
+0.15\ht0\hbox to0pt{\kern0.4\wd0\vrule height0.8\ht0\hss}\box0}}
+{\setbox0=\hbox{$\scriptstyle\rm Q$}\hbox{\raise
+0.15\ht0\hbox to0pt{\kern0.4\wd0\vrule height0.7\ht0\hss}\box0}}
+{\setbox0=\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\rm Q$}\hbox{\raise
+0.15\ht0\hbox to0pt{\kern0.4\wd0\vrule height0.7\ht0\hss}\box0}}}}
+\def\bbbt{{\mathchoice {\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\rm
+T$}\hbox{\hbox to0pt{\kern0.3\wd0\vrule height0.9\ht0\hss}\box0}}
+{\setbox0=\hbox{$\textstyle\rm T$}\hbox{\hbox
+to0pt{\kern0.3\wd0\vrule height0.9\ht0\hss}\box0}}
+{\setbox0=\hbox{$\scriptstyle\rm T$}\hbox{\hbox
+to0pt{\kern0.3\wd0\vrule height0.9\ht0\hss}\box0}}
+{\setbox0=\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\rm T$}\hbox{\hbox
+to0pt{\kern0.3\wd0\vrule height0.9\ht0\hss}\box0}}}}
+\def\bbbs{{\mathchoice
+{\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle     \rm S$}\hbox{\raise0.5\ht0\hbox
+to0pt{\kern0.35\wd0\vrule height0.45\ht0\hss}\hbox
+to0pt{\kern0.55\wd0\vrule height0.5\ht0\hss}\box0}}
+{\setbox0=\hbox{$\textstyle        \rm S$}\hbox{\raise0.5\ht0\hbox
+to0pt{\kern0.35\wd0\vrule height0.45\ht0\hss}\hbox
+to0pt{\kern0.55\wd0\vrule height0.5\ht0\hss}\box0}}
+{\setbox0=\hbox{$\scriptstyle      \rm S$}\hbox{\raise0.5\ht0\hbox
+to0pt{\kern0.35\wd0\vrule height0.45\ht0\hss}\raise0.05\ht0\hbox
+to0pt{\kern0.5\wd0\vrule height0.45\ht0\hss}\box0}}
+{\setbox0=\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\rm S$}\hbox{\raise0.5\ht0\hbox
+to0pt{\kern0.4\wd0\vrule height0.45\ht0\hss}\raise0.05\ht0\hbox
+to0pt{\kern0.55\wd0\vrule height0.45\ht0\hss}\box0}}}}
+\def\bbbz{{\mathchoice {\hbox{$\mathsf\textstyle Z\kern-0.4em Z$}}
+{\hbox{$\mathsf\textstyle Z\kern-0.4em Z$}}
+{\hbox{$\mathsf\scriptstyle Z\kern-0.3em Z$}}
+{\hbox{$\mathsf\scriptscriptstyle Z\kern-0.2em Z$}}}}
+
+\let\ts\,
+
+\setlength\leftmargini  {17\p@}
+\setlength\leftmargin    {\leftmargini}
+\setlength\leftmarginii  {\leftmargini}
+\setlength\leftmarginiii {\leftmargini}
+\setlength\leftmarginiv  {\leftmargini}
+\setlength  \labelsep  {.5em}
+\setlength  \labelwidth{\leftmargini}
+\addtolength\labelwidth{-\labelsep}
+
+\def\@listI{\leftmargin\leftmargini
+            \parsep 0\p@ \@plus1\p@ \@minus\p@
+            \topsep 8\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
+            \itemsep0\p@}
+\let\@listi\@listI
+\@listi
+\def\@listii {\leftmargin\leftmarginii
+              \labelwidth\leftmarginii
+              \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+              \topsep    0\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus\p@}
+\def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii
+              \labelwidth\leftmarginiii
+              \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep
+              \topsep    0\p@ \@plus\p@\@minus\p@
+              \parsep    \z@
+              \partopsep \p@ \@plus\z@ \@minus\p@}
+
+\renewcommand\labelitemi{\normalfont\bfseries --}
+\renewcommand\labelitemii{$\m@th\bullet$}
+
+\setlength\arraycolsep{1.4\p@}
+\setlength\tabcolsep{1.4\p@}
+
+\def\tableofcontents{\chapter*{\contentsname\@mkboth{{\contentsname}}%
+                                                    {{\contentsname}}}
+ \def\authcount##1{\setcounter{auco}{##1}\setcounter{@auth}{1}}
+ \def\lastand{\ifnum\value{auco}=2\relax
+                 \unskip{} \andname\
+              \else
+                 \unskip \lastandname\
+              \fi}%
+ \def\and{\stepcounter{@auth}\relax
+          \ifnum\value{@auth}=\value{auco}%
+             \lastand
+          \else
+             \unskip,
+          \fi}%
+ \@starttoc{toc}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi}
+
+\def\l@part#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}%
+   \addvspace{2em plus\p@}%  % space above part line
+   \begingroup
+     \parindent \z@
+     \rightskip \z@ plus 5em
+     \hrule\vskip5pt
+     \large               % same size as for a contribution heading
+     \bfseries\boldmath   % set line in boldface
+     \leavevmode          % TeX command to enter horizontal mode.
+     #1\par
+     \vskip5pt
+     \hrule
+     \vskip1pt
+     \nobreak             % Never break after part entry
+   \endgroup}
+
+\def\@dotsep{2}
+
+\def\hyperhrefextend{\ifx\hyper@anchor\@undefined\else
+{chapter.\thechapter}\fi}
+
+\def\addnumcontentsmark#1#2#3{%
+\addtocontents{#1}{\protect\contentsline{#2}{\protect\numberline
+                     {\thechapter}#3}{\thepage}\hyperhrefextend}}
+\def\addcontentsmark#1#2#3{%
+\addtocontents{#1}{\protect\contentsline{#2}{#3}{\thepage}\hyperhrefextend}}
+\def\addcontentsmarkwop#1#2#3{%
+\addtocontents{#1}{\protect\contentsline{#2}{#3}{0}\hyperhrefextend}}
+
+\def\@adcmk[#1]{\ifcase #1 \or
+\def\@gtempa{\addnumcontentsmark}%
+  \or    \def\@gtempa{\addcontentsmark}%
+  \or    \def\@gtempa{\addcontentsmarkwop}%
+  \fi\@gtempa{toc}{chapter}}
+\def\addtocmark{\@ifnextchar[{\@adcmk}{\@adcmk[3]}}
+
+\def\l@chapter#1#2{\addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}
+ \vskip 1.0em plus 1pt \@tempdima 1.5em \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@tocrmarg
+ \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 2cm
+ \parfillskip -\rightskip \pretolerance=10000
+ \leavevmode \advance\leftskip\@tempdima \hskip -\leftskip
+ {\large\bfseries\boldmath#1}\ifx0#2\hfil\null
+ \else
+      \nobreak
+      \leaders\hbox{$\m@th \mkern \@dotsep mu.\mkern
+      \@dotsep mu$}\hfill
+      \nobreak\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}%
+ \fi\par
+ \penalty\@highpenalty \endgroup}
+
+\def\l@title#1#2{\addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}
+ \addvspace{8pt plus 1pt}
+ \@tempdima \z@
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@tocrmarg
+ \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 2cm
+ \parfillskip -\rightskip \pretolerance=10000
+ \leavevmode \advance\leftskip\@tempdima \hskip -\leftskip
+ #1\nobreak
+ \leaders\hbox{$\m@th \mkern \@dotsep mu.\mkern
+ \@dotsep mu$}\hfill
+ \nobreak\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par
+ \penalty\@highpenalty \endgroup}
+
+\def\l@author#1#2{\addpenalty{\@highpenalty}
+ \@tempdima=\z@ %15\p@
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@tocrmarg
+ \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 2cm
+ \pretolerance=10000
+ \leavevmode \advance\leftskip\@tempdima %\hskip -\leftskip
+ \textit{#1}\par
+ \penalty\@highpenalty \endgroup}
+
+%\setcounter{tocdepth}{0}
+\newdimen\tocchpnum
+\newdimen\tocsecnum
+\newdimen\tocsectotal
+\newdimen\tocsubsecnum
+\newdimen\tocsubsectotal
+\newdimen\tocsubsubsecnum
+\newdimen\tocsubsubsectotal
+\newdimen\tocparanum
+\newdimen\tocparatotal
+\newdimen\tocsubparanum
+\tocchpnum=\z@            % no chapter numbers
+\tocsecnum=15\p@          % section 88. plus 2.222pt
+\tocsubsecnum=23\p@       % subsection 88.8 plus 2.222pt
+\tocsubsubsecnum=27\p@    % subsubsection 88.8.8 plus 1.444pt
+\tocparanum=35\p@         % paragraph 88.8.8.8 plus 1.666pt
+\tocsubparanum=43\p@      % subparagraph 88.8.8.8.8 plus 1.888pt
+\def\calctocindent{%
+\tocsectotal=\tocchpnum
+\advance\tocsectotal by\tocsecnum
+\tocsubsectotal=\tocsectotal
+\advance\tocsubsectotal by\tocsubsecnum
+\tocsubsubsectotal=\tocsubsectotal
+\advance\tocsubsubsectotal by\tocsubsubsecnum
+\tocparatotal=\tocsubsubsectotal
+\advance\tocparatotal by\tocparanum}
+\calctocindent
+
+\def\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{\tocchpnum}{\tocsecnum}}
+\def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{\tocsectotal}{\tocsubsecnum}}
+\def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{\tocsubsectotal}{\tocsubsubsecnum}}
+\def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{\tocsubsubsectotal}{\tocparanum}}
+\def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{\tocparatotal}{\tocsubparanum}}
+
+\def\listoffigures{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
+ \fi\section*{\listfigurename\@mkboth{{\listfigurename}}{{\listfigurename}}}
+ \@starttoc{lof}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi}
+\def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{1.5em}}
+
+\def\listoftables{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
+ \fi\section*{\listtablename\@mkboth{{\listtablename}}{{\listtablename}}}
+ \@starttoc{lot}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi}
+\let\l@table\l@figure
+
+\renewcommand\listoffigures{%
+    \section*{\listfigurename
+      \@mkboth{\listfigurename}{\listfigurename}}%
+    \@starttoc{lof}%
+    }
+
+\renewcommand\listoftables{%
+    \section*{\listtablename
+      \@mkboth{\listtablename}{\listtablename}}%
+    \@starttoc{lot}%
+    }
+
+\ifx\oribibl\undefined
+\ifx\citeauthoryear\undefined
+\renewenvironment{thebibliography}[1]
+     {\section*{\refname}
+      \def\@biblabel##1{##1.}
+      \small
+      \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
+           {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
+            \leftmargin\labelwidth
+            \advance\leftmargin\labelsep
+            \if@openbib
+              \advance\leftmargin\bibindent
+              \itemindent -\bibindent
+              \listparindent \itemindent
+              \parsep \z@
+            \fi
+            \usecounter{enumiv}%
+            \let\p@enumiv\@empty
+            \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
+      \if@openbib
+        \renewcommand\newblock{\par}%
+      \else
+        \renewcommand\newblock{\hskip .11em \@plus.33em \@minus.07em}%
+      \fi
+      \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000%
+      \sfcode`\.=\@m}
+     {\def\@noitemerr
+       {\@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}}%
+      \endlist}
+\def\@lbibitem[#1]#2{\item[{[#1]}\hfill]\if@filesw
+     {\let\protect\noexpand\immediate
+     \write\@auxout{\string\bibcite{#2}{#1}}}\fi\ignorespaces}
+\newcount\@tempcntc
+\def\@citex[#1]#2{\if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{#2}}\fi
+  \@tempcnta\z@\@tempcntb\m@ne\def\@citea{}\@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do
+    {\@ifundefined
+       {b@\@citeb}{\@citeo\@tempcntb\m@ne\@citea\def\@citea{,}{\bfseries
+        ?}\@warning
+       {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}%
+    {\setbox\z@\hbox{\global\@tempcntc0\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname\relax}%
+     \ifnum\@tempcntc=\z@ \@citeo\@tempcntb\m@ne
+       \@citea\def\@citea{,}\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}%
+     \else
+      \advance\@tempcntb\@ne
+      \ifnum\@tempcntb=\@tempcntc
+      \else\advance\@tempcntb\m@ne\@citeo
+      \@tempcnta\@tempcntc\@tempcntb\@tempcntc\fi\fi}}\@citeo}{#1}}
+\def\@citeo{\ifnum\@tempcnta>\@tempcntb\else
+               \@citea\def\@citea{,\,\hskip\z@skip}%
+               \ifnum\@tempcnta=\@tempcntb\the\@tempcnta\else
+               {\advance\@tempcnta\@ne\ifnum\@tempcnta=\@tempcntb \else
+                \def\@citea{--}\fi
+      \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne\the\@tempcnta\@citea\the\@tempcntb}\fi\fi}
+\else
+\renewenvironment{thebibliography}[1]
+     {\section*{\refname}
+      \small
+      \list{}%
+           {\settowidth\labelwidth{}%
+            \leftmargin\parindent
+            \itemindent=-\parindent
+            \labelsep=\z@
+            \if@openbib
+              \advance\leftmargin\bibindent
+              \itemindent -\bibindent
+              \listparindent \itemindent
+              \parsep \z@
+            \fi
+            \usecounter{enumiv}%
+            \let\p@enumiv\@empty
+            \renewcommand\theenumiv{}}%
+      \if@openbib
+        \renewcommand\newblock{\par}%
+      \else
+        \renewcommand\newblock{\hskip .11em \@plus.33em \@minus.07em}%
+      \fi
+      \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000%
+      \sfcode`\.=\@m}
+     {\def\@noitemerr
+       {\@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}}%
+      \endlist}
+      \def\@cite#1{#1}%
+      \def\@lbibitem[#1]#2{\item[]\if@filesw
+        {\def\protect##1{\string ##1\space}\immediate
+      \write\@auxout{\string\bibcite{#2}{#1}}}\fi\ignorespaces}
+   \fi
+\else
+\@cons\@openbib@code{\noexpand\small}
+\fi
+
+\def\idxquad{\hskip 10\p@}% space that divides entry from number
+
+\def\@idxitem{\par\hangindent 10\p@}
+
+\def\subitem{\par\setbox0=\hbox{--\enspace}% second order
+                \noindent\hangindent\wd0\box0}% index entry
+
+\def\subsubitem{\par\setbox0=\hbox{--\,--\enspace}% third
+                \noindent\hangindent\wd0\box0}% order index entry
+
+\def\indexspace{\par \vskip 10\p@ plus5\p@ minus3\p@\relax}
+
+\renewenvironment{theindex}
+               {\@mkboth{\indexname}{\indexname}%
+                \thispagestyle{empty}\parindent\z@
+                \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax
+                \let\item\par
+                \def\,{\relax\ifmmode\mskip\thinmuskip
+                             \else\hskip0.2em\ignorespaces\fi}%
+                \normalfont\small
+                \begin{multicols}{2}[\@makeschapterhead{\indexname}]%
+                }
+                {\end{multicols}}
+
+\renewcommand\footnoterule{%
+  \kern-3\p@
+  \hrule\@width 2truecm
+  \kern2.6\p@}
+  \newdimen\fnindent
+  \fnindent1em
+\long\def\@makefntext#1{%
+    \parindent \fnindent%
+    \leftskip \fnindent%
+    \noindent
+    \llap{\hb@xt@1em{\hss\@makefnmark\ }}\ignorespaces#1}
+
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
+  \vskip\abovecaptionskip
+  \sbox\@tempboxa{{\bfseries #1.} #2}%
+  \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize
+    {\bfseries #1.} #2\par
+  \else
+    \global \@minipagefalse
+    \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
+  \fi
+  \vskip\belowcaptionskip}
+
+\def\fps@figure{htbp}
+\def\fnum@figure{\figurename\thinspace\thefigure}
+\def \@floatboxreset {%
+        \reset@font
+        \small
+        \@setnobreak
+        \@setminipage
+}
+\def\fps@table{htbp}
+\def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable}
+\renewenvironment{table}
+               {\setlength\abovecaptionskip{0\p@}%
+                \setlength\belowcaptionskip{10\p@}%
+                \@float{table}}
+               {\end@float}
+\renewenvironment{table*}
+               {\setlength\abovecaptionskip{0\p@}%
+                \setlength\belowcaptionskip{10\p@}%
+                \@dblfloat{table}}
+               {\end@dblfloat}
+
+\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{\par\addcontentsline{\csname
+  ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}{\protect\numberline{\csname
+  the#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #2}}\begingroup
+    \@parboxrestore
+    \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par
+  \endgroup}
+
+% LaTeX does not provide a command to enter the authors institute
+% addresses. The \institute command is defined here.
+
+\newcounter{@inst}
+\newcounter{@auth}
+\newcounter{auco}
+\newdimen\instindent
+\newbox\authrun
+\newtoks\authorrunning
+\newtoks\tocauthor
+\newbox\titrun
+\newtoks\titlerunning
+\newtoks\toctitle
+
+\def\clearheadinfo{\gdef\@author{No Author Given}%
+                   \gdef\@title{No Title Given}%
+                   \gdef\@subtitle{}%
+                   \gdef\@institute{No Institute Given}%
+                   \gdef\@thanks{}%
+                   \global\titlerunning={}\global\authorrunning={}%
+                   \global\toctitle={}\global\tocauthor={}}
+
+\def\institute#1{\gdef\@institute{#1}}
+
+\def\institutename{\par
+ \begingroup
+ \parskip=\z@
+ \parindent=\z@
+ \setcounter{@inst}{1}%
+ \def\and{\par\stepcounter{@inst}%
+ \noindent$^{\the@inst}$\enspace\ignorespaces}%
+ \setbox0=\vbox{\def\thanks##1{}\@institute}%
+ \ifnum\c@@inst=1\relax
+   \gdef\fnnstart{0}%
+ \else
+   \xdef\fnnstart{\c@@inst}%
+   \setcounter{@inst}{1}%
+   \noindent$^{\the@inst}$\enspace
+ \fi
+ \ignorespaces
+ \@institute\par
+ \endgroup}
+
+\def\@fnsymbol#1{\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or\star\or{\star\star}\or
+   {\star\star\star}\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or
+   \mathchar "278\or \mathchar "27B\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger
+   \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\@ctrerr\fi}}
+
+\def\inst#1{\unskip$^{#1}$}
+\def\fnmsep{\unskip$^,$}
+\def\email#1{{\tt#1}}
+\AtBeginDocument{\@ifundefined{url}{\def\url#1{#1}}{}%
+\@ifpackageloaded{babel}{%
+\@ifundefined{extrasenglish}{}{\addto\extrasenglish{\switcht@albion}}%
+\@ifundefined{extrasfrenchb}{}{\addto\extrasfrenchb{\switcht@francais}}%
+\@ifundefined{extrasgerman}{}{\addto\extrasgerman{\switcht@deutsch}}%
+}{\switcht@@therlang}%
+}
+\def\homedir{\~{ }}
+
+\def\subtitle#1{\gdef\@subtitle{#1}}
+\clearheadinfo
+
+\renewcommand\maketitle{\newpage
+  \refstepcounter{chapter}%
+  \stepcounter{section}%
+  \setcounter{section}{0}%
+  \setcounter{subsection}{0}%
+  \setcounter{figure}{0}
+  \setcounter{table}{0}
+  \setcounter{equation}{0}
+  \setcounter{footnote}{0}%
+  \begingroup
+    \parindent=\z@
+    \renewcommand\thefootnote{\@fnsymbol\c@footnote}%
+    \if@twocolumn
+      \ifnum \col@number=\@ne
+        \@maketitle
+      \else
+        \twocolumn[\@maketitle]%
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \newpage
+      \global\@topnum\z@   % Prevents figures from going at top of page.
+      \@maketitle
+    \fi
+    \thispagestyle{empty}\@thanks
+%
+    \def\\{\unskip\ \ignorespaces}\def\inst##1{\unskip{}}%
+    \def\thanks##1{\unskip{}}\def\fnmsep{\unskip}%
+    \instindent=\hsize
+    \advance\instindent by-\headlineindent
+%    \if!\the\toctitle!\addcontentsline{toc}{title}{\@title}\else
+%       \addcontentsline{toc}{title}{\the\toctitle}\fi
+    \if@runhead
+       \if!\the\titlerunning!\else
+         \edef\@title{\the\titlerunning}%
+       \fi
+       \global\setbox\titrun=\hbox{\small\rm\unboldmath\ignorespaces\@title}%
+       \ifdim\wd\titrun>\instindent
+          \typeout{Title too long for running head. Please supply}%
+          \typeout{a shorter form with \string\titlerunning\space prior to
+                   \string\maketitle}%
+          \global\setbox\titrun=\hbox{\small\rm
+          Title Suppressed Due to Excessive Length}%
+       \fi
+       \xdef\@title{\copy\titrun}%
+    \fi
+%
+    \if!\the\tocauthor!\relax
+      {\def\and{\noexpand\protect\noexpand\and}%
+      \protected@xdef\toc@uthor{\@author}}%
+    \else
+      \def\\{\noexpand\protect\noexpand\newline}%
+      \protected@xdef\scratch{\the\tocauthor}%
+      \protected@xdef\toc@uthor{\scratch}%
+    \fi
+%    \addcontentsline{toc}{author}{\toc@uthor}%
+    \if@runhead
+       \if!\the\authorrunning!
+         \value{@inst}=\value{@auth}%
+         \setcounter{@auth}{1}%
+       \else
+         \edef\@author{\the\authorrunning}%
+       \fi
+       \global\setbox\authrun=\hbox{\small\unboldmath\@author\unskip}%
+       \ifdim\wd\authrun>\instindent
+          \typeout{Names of authors too long for running head. Please supply}%
+          \typeout{a shorter form with \string\authorrunning\space prior to
+                   \string\maketitle}%
+          \global\setbox\authrun=\hbox{\small\rm
+          Authors Suppressed Due to Excessive Length}%
+       \fi
+       \xdef\@author{\copy\authrun}%
+       \markboth{\@author}{\@title}%
+     \fi
+  \endgroup
+  \setcounter{footnote}{\fnnstart}%
+  \clearheadinfo}
+%
+\def\@maketitle{\newpage
+ \markboth{}{}%
+ \def\lastand{\ifnum\value{@inst}=2\relax
+                 \unskip{} \andname\
+              \else
+                 \unskip \lastandname\
+              \fi}%
+ \def\and{\stepcounter{@auth}\relax
+          \ifnum\value{@auth}=\value{@inst}%
+             \lastand
+          \else
+             \unskip,
+          \fi}%
+ \begin{center}%
+ \let\newline\\
+ {\Large \bfseries\boldmath
+  \pretolerance=10000
+  \@title \par}\vskip .8cm
+\if!\@subtitle!\else {\large \bfseries\boldmath
+  \vskip -.65cm
+  \pretolerance=10000
+  \@subtitle \par}\vskip .8cm\fi
+ \setbox0=\vbox{\setcounter{@auth}{1}\def\and{\stepcounter{@auth}}%
+ \def\thanks##1{}\@author}%
+ \global\value{@inst}=\value{@auth}%
+ \global\value{auco}=\value{@auth}%
+ \setcounter{@auth}{1}%
+{\lineskip .5em
+\noindent\ignorespaces
+\@author\vskip.35cm}
+ {\small\institutename}
+ \end{center}%
+ }
+
+% definition of the "\spnewtheorem" command.
+%
+% Usage:
+%
+%     \spnewtheorem{env_nam}{caption}[within]{cap_font}{body_font}
+% or  \spnewtheorem{env_nam}[numbered_like]{caption}{cap_font}{body_font}
+% or  \spnewtheorem*{env_nam}{caption}{cap_font}{body_font}
+%
+% New is "cap_font" and "body_font". It stands for
+% fontdefinition of the caption and the text itself.
+%
+% "\spnewtheorem*" gives a theorem without number.
+%
+% A defined spnewthoerem environment is used as described
+% by Lamport.
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\def\@thmcountersep{}
+\def\@thmcounterend{.}
+
+\def\spnewtheorem{\@ifstar{\@sthm}{\@Sthm}}
+
+% definition of \spnewtheorem with number
+
+\def\@spnthm#1#2{%
+  \@ifnextchar[{\@spxnthm{#1}{#2}}{\@spynthm{#1}{#2}}}
+\def\@Sthm#1{\@ifnextchar[{\@spothm{#1}}{\@spnthm{#1}}}
+
+\def\@spxnthm#1#2[#3]#4#5{\expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname
+   {\@definecounter{#1}\@addtoreset{#1}{#3}%
+   \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{\expandafter\noexpand
+     \csname the#3\endcsname \noexpand\@thmcountersep \@thmcounter{#1}}%
+   \expandafter\xdef\csname #1name\endcsname{#2}%
+   \global\@namedef{#1}{\@spthm{#1}{\csname #1name\endcsname}{#4}{#5}}%
+                              \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}
+
+\def\@spynthm#1#2#3#4{\expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname
+   {\@definecounter{#1}%
+   \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{\@thmcounter{#1}}%
+   \expandafter\xdef\csname #1name\endcsname{#2}%
+   \global\@namedef{#1}{\@spthm{#1}{\csname #1name\endcsname}{#3}{#4}}%
+                               \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}
+
+\def\@spothm#1[#2]#3#4#5{%
+  \@ifundefined{c@#2}{\@latexerr{No theorem environment `#2' defined}\@eha}%
+  {\expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname
+  {\global\@namedef{the#1}{\@nameuse{the#2}}%
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname #1name\endcsname{#3}%
+  \global\@namedef{#1}{\@spthm{#2}{\csname #1name\endcsname}{#4}{#5}}%
+  \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}}
+
+\def\@spthm#1#2#3#4{\topsep 7\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
+\refstepcounter{#1}%
+\@ifnextchar[{\@spythm{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}{\@spxthm{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}}
+
+\def\@spxthm#1#2#3#4{\@spbegintheorem{#2}{\csname the#1\endcsname}{#3}{#4}%
+                    \ignorespaces}
+
+\def\@spythm#1#2#3#4[#5]{\@spopargbegintheorem{#2}{\csname
+       the#1\endcsname}{#5}{#3}{#4}\ignorespaces}
+
+\def\@spbegintheorem#1#2#3#4{\trivlist
+                 \item[\hskip\labelsep{#3#1\ #2\@thmcounterend}]#4}
+
+\def\@spopargbegintheorem#1#2#3#4#5{\trivlist
+      \item[\hskip\labelsep{#4#1\ #2}]{#4(#3)\@thmcounterend\ }#5}
+
+% definition of \spnewtheorem* without number
+
+\def\@sthm#1#2{\@Ynthm{#1}{#2}}
+
+\def\@Ynthm#1#2#3#4{\expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname
+   {\global\@namedef{#1}{\@Thm{\csname #1name\endcsname}{#3}{#4}}%
+    \expandafter\xdef\csname #1name\endcsname{#2}%
+    \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}
+
+\def\@Thm#1#2#3{\topsep 7\p@ \@plus2\p@ \@minus4\p@
+\@ifnextchar[{\@Ythm{#1}{#2}{#3}}{\@Xthm{#1}{#2}{#3}}}
+
+\def\@Xthm#1#2#3{\@Begintheorem{#1}{#2}{#3}\ignorespaces}
+
+\def\@Ythm#1#2#3[#4]{\@Opargbegintheorem{#1}
+       {#4}{#2}{#3}\ignorespaces}
+
+\def\@Begintheorem#1#2#3{#3\trivlist
+                           \item[\hskip\labelsep{#2#1\@thmcounterend}]}
+
+\def\@Opargbegintheorem#1#2#3#4{#4\trivlist
+      \item[\hskip\labelsep{#3#1}]{#3(#2)\@thmcounterend\ }}
+
+\if@envcntsect
+   \def\@thmcountersep{.}
+   \spnewtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}[section]{\bfseries}{\itshape}
+\else
+   \spnewtheorem{theorem}{Theorem}{\bfseries}{\itshape}
+   \if@envcntreset
+      \@addtoreset{theorem}{section}
+   \else
+      \@addtoreset{theorem}{chapter}
+   \fi
+\fi
+
+%definition of divers theorem environments
+\spnewtheorem*{claim}{Claim}{\itshape}{\rmfamily}
+\spnewtheorem*{proof}{Proof}{\itshape}{\rmfamily}
+\if@envcntsame % alle Umgebungen wie Theorem.
+   \def\spn@wtheorem#1#2#3#4{\@spothm{#1}[theorem]{#2}{#3}{#4}}
+\else % alle Umgebungen mit eigenem Zaehler
+   \if@envcntsect % mit section numeriert
+      \def\spn@wtheorem#1#2#3#4{\@spxnthm{#1}{#2}[section]{#3}{#4}}
+   \else % nicht mit section numeriert
+      \if@envcntreset
+         \def\spn@wtheorem#1#2#3#4{\@spynthm{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}
+                                   \@addtoreset{#1}{section}}
+      \else
+         \def\spn@wtheorem#1#2#3#4{\@spynthm{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}
+                                   \@addtoreset{#1}{chapter}}%
+      \fi
+   \fi
+\fi
+\spn@wtheorem{case}{Case}{\itshape}{\rmfamily}
+\spn@wtheorem{conjecture}{Conjecture}{\itshape}{\rmfamily}
+\spn@wtheorem{corollary}{Corollary}{\bfseries}{\itshape}
+\spn@wtheorem{definition}{Definition}{\bfseries}{\itshape}
+\spn@wtheorem{example}{Example}{\itshape}{\rmfamily}
+\spn@wtheorem{exercise}{Exercise}{\itshape}{\rmfamily}
+\spn@wtheorem{lemma}{Lemma}{\bfseries}{\itshape}
+\spn@wtheorem{note}{Note}{\itshape}{\rmfamily}
+\spn@wtheorem{problem}{Problem}{\itshape}{\rmfamily}
+\spn@wtheorem{property}{Property}{\itshape}{\rmfamily}
+\spn@wtheorem{proposition}{Proposition}{\bfseries}{\itshape}
+\spn@wtheorem{question}{Question}{\itshape}{\rmfamily}
+\spn@wtheorem{solution}{Solution}{\itshape}{\rmfamily}
+\spn@wtheorem{remark}{Remark}{\itshape}{\rmfamily}
+
+\def\@takefromreset#1#2{%
+    \def\@tempa{#1}%
+    \let\@tempd\@elt
+    \def\@elt##1{%
+        \def\@tempb{##1}%
+        \ifx\@tempa\@tempb\else
+            \@addtoreset{##1}{#2}%
+        \fi}%
+    \expandafter\expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempc\csname cl@#2\endcsname
+    \expandafter\def\csname cl@#2\endcsname{}%
+    \@tempc
+    \let\@elt\@tempd}
+
+\def\theopargself{\def\@spopargbegintheorem##1##2##3##4##5{\trivlist
+      \item[\hskip\labelsep{##4##1\ ##2}]{##4##3\@thmcounterend\ }##5}
+                  \def\@Opargbegintheorem##1##2##3##4{##4\trivlist
+      \item[\hskip\labelsep{##3##1}]{##3##2\@thmcounterend\ }}
+      }
+
+\renewenvironment{abstract}{%
+      \list{}{\advance\topsep by0.35cm\relax\small
+      \leftmargin=1cm
+      \labelwidth=\z@
+      \listparindent=\z@
+      \itemindent\listparindent
+      \rightmargin\leftmargin}\item[\hskip\labelsep
+                                    \bfseries\abstractname]}
+    {\endlist}
+
+\newdimen\headlineindent             % dimension for space between
+\headlineindent=1.166cm              % number and text of headings.
+
+\def\ps@headings{\let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+   \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
+   \def\@evenhead{\normalfont\small\rlap{\thepage}\hspace{\headlineindent}%
+                  \leftmark\hfil}
+   \def\@oddhead{\normalfont\small\hfil\rightmark\hspace{\headlineindent}%
+                 \llap{\thepage}}
+   \def\chaptermark##1{}%
+   \def\sectionmark##1{}%
+   \def\subsectionmark##1{}}
+
+\def\ps@titlepage{\let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
+   \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
+   \def\@evenhead{\normalfont\small\rlap{\thepage}\hspace{\headlineindent}%
+                  \hfil}
+   \def\@oddhead{\normalfont\small\hfil\hspace{\headlineindent}%
+                 \llap{\thepage}}
+   \def\chaptermark##1{}%
+   \def\sectionmark##1{}%
+   \def\subsectionmark##1{}}
+
+\if@runhead\ps@headings\else
+\ps@empty\fi
+
+\setlength\arraycolsep{1.4\p@}
+\setlength\tabcolsep{1.4\p@}
+
+\endinput
+%end of file llncs.cls
diff -r 00ac265b251b -r 02b6fab379ba Journal/document/mathpartir.sty
--- /dev/null	Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
+++ b/Journal/document/mathpartir.sty	Sat Jul 27 08:17:54 2013 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,446 @@
+%  Mathpartir --- Math Paragraph for Typesetting Inference Rules
+%
+%  Copyright (C) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 Didier Rémy
+%
+%  Author         : Didier Remy 
+%  Version        : 1.2.0
+%  Bug Reports    : to author
+%  Web Site       : http://pauillac.inria.fr/~remy/latex/
+% 
+%  Mathpartir is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+%  it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+%  the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+%  any later version.
+%  
+%  Mathpartir is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+%  but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+%  MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+%  GNU General Public License for more details 
+%  (http://pauillac.inria.fr/~remy/license/GPL).
+%
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%  File mathpartir.sty (LaTeX macros)
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+\ProvidesPackage{mathpartir}
+    [2005/12/20 version 1.2.0 Math Paragraph for Typesetting Inference Rules]
+
+%%
+
+%% Identification
+%% Preliminary declarations
+
+\RequirePackage {keyval}
+
+%% Options
+%% More declarations
+
+%% PART I: Typesetting maths in paragraphe mode
+
+%% \newdimen \mpr@tmpdim
+%% Dimens are a precious ressource. Uses seems to be local.
+\let \mpr@tmpdim \@tempdima
+
+% To ensure hevea \hva compatibility, \hva should expands to nothing 
+% in mathpar or in inferrule
+\let \mpr@hva \empty
+
+%% normal paragraph parametters, should rather be taken dynamically
+\def \mpr@savepar {%
+  \edef \MathparNormalpar
+     {\noexpand \lineskiplimit \the\lineskiplimit
+      \noexpand \lineskip \the\lineskip}%
+  }
+
+\def \mpr@rulelineskip {\lineskiplimit=0.3em\lineskip=0.2em plus 0.1em}
+\def \mpr@lesslineskip {\lineskiplimit=0.6em\lineskip=0.5em plus 0.2em}
+\def \mpr@lineskip  {\lineskiplimit=1.2em\lineskip=1.2em plus 0.2em}
+\let \MathparLineskip \mpr@lineskip
+\def \mpr@paroptions {\MathparLineskip}
+\let \mpr@prebindings \relax
+
+\newskip \mpr@andskip \mpr@andskip 2em plus 0.5fil minus 0.5em
+
+\def \mpr@goodbreakand
+   {\hskip -\mpr@andskip  \penalty -1000\hskip \mpr@andskip}
+\def \mpr@and {\hskip \mpr@andskip}
+\def \mpr@andcr {\penalty 50\mpr@and}
+\def \mpr@cr {\penalty -10000\mpr@and}
+\def \mpr@eqno #1{\mpr@andcr #1\hskip 0em plus -1fil \penalty 10}
+
+\def \mpr@bindings {%
+  \let \and \mpr@andcr
+  \let \par \mpr@andcr
+  \let \\\mpr@cr
+  \let \eqno \mpr@eqno
+  \let \hva \mpr@hva
+  } 
+\let \MathparBindings \mpr@bindings
+
+% \@ifundefined {ignorespacesafterend}
+%    {\def \ignorespacesafterend {\aftergroup \ignorespaces}
+
+\newenvironment{mathpar}[1][]
+  {$$\mpr@savepar \parskip 0em \hsize \linewidth \centering
+     \vbox \bgroup \mpr@prebindings \mpr@paroptions #1\ifmmode $\else
+     \noindent $\displaystyle\fi
+     \MathparBindings}
+  {\unskip \ifmmode $\fi\egroup $$\ignorespacesafterend}
+
+\newenvironment{mathparpagebreakable}[1][]
+  {\begingroup 
+   \par
+   \mpr@savepar \parskip 0em \hsize \linewidth \centering
+      \mpr@prebindings \mpr@paroptions #1%
+      \vskip \abovedisplayskip \vskip -\lineskip%
+     \ifmmode  \else  $\displaystyle\fi
+     \MathparBindings
+  }
+  {\unskip
+   \ifmmode $\fi \par\endgroup
+   \vskip \belowdisplayskip
+   \noindent
+  \ignorespacesafterend}
+
+% \def \math@mathpar #1{\setbox0 \hbox {$\displaystyle #1$}\ifnum
+%     \wd0 < \hsize  $$\box0$$\else \bmathpar #1\emathpar \fi}
+
+%%% HOV BOXES
+
+\def \mathvbox@ #1{\hbox \bgroup \mpr@normallineskip 
+  \vbox \bgroup \tabskip 0em \let \\ \cr
+  \halign \bgroup \hfil $##$\hfil\cr #1\crcr \egroup \egroup
+  \egroup}
+
+\def \mathhvbox@ #1{\setbox0 \hbox {\let \\\qquad $#1$}\ifnum \wd0 < \hsize
+      \box0\else \mathvbox {#1}\fi}
+
+
+%% Part II -- operations on lists
+
+\newtoks \mpr@lista
+\newtoks \mpr@listb
+
+\long \def\mpr@cons #1\mpr@to#2{\mpr@lista {\\{#1}}\mpr@listb \expandafter
+{#2}\edef #2{\the \mpr@lista \the \mpr@listb}}
+
+\long \def\mpr@snoc #1\mpr@to#2{\mpr@lista {\\{#1}}\mpr@listb \expandafter
+{#2}\edef #2{\the \mpr@listb\the\mpr@lista}}
+
+\long \def \mpr@concat#1=#2\mpr@to#3{\mpr@lista \expandafter {#2}\mpr@listb
+\expandafter {#3}\edef #1{\the \mpr@listb\the\mpr@lista}}
+
+\def \mpr@head #1\mpr@to #2{\expandafter \mpr@head@ #1\mpr@head@ #1#2}
+\long \def \mpr@head@ #1#2\mpr@head@ #3#4{\def #4{#1}\def#3{#2}}
+
+\def \mpr@flatten #1\mpr@to #2{\expandafter \mpr@flatten@ #1\mpr@flatten@ #1#2}
+\long \def \mpr@flatten@ \\#1\\#2\mpr@flatten@ #3#4{\def #4{#1}\def #3{\\#2}}
+
+\def \mpr@makelist #1\mpr@to #2{\def \mpr@all {#1}%
+   \mpr@lista {\\}\mpr@listb \expandafter {\mpr@all}\edef \mpr@all {\the
+   \mpr@lista \the \mpr@listb \the \mpr@lista}\let #2\empty 
+   \def \mpr@stripof ##1##2\mpr@stripend{\def \mpr@stripped{##2}}\loop
+     \mpr@flatten \mpr@all \mpr@to \mpr@one
+     \expandafter \mpr@snoc \mpr@one \mpr@to #2\expandafter \mpr@stripof
+     \mpr@all \mpr@stripend  
+     \ifx \mpr@stripped \empty \let \mpr@isempty 0\else \let \mpr@isempty 1\fi
+     \ifx 1\mpr@isempty
+   \repeat
+}
+
+\def \mpr@rev #1\mpr@to #2{\let \mpr@tmp \empty
+   \def \\##1{\mpr@cons ##1\mpr@to \mpr@tmp}#1\let #2\mpr@tmp}
+
+%% Part III -- Type inference rules
+
+\newif \if@premisse
+\newbox \mpr@hlist
+\newbox \mpr@vlist
+\newif \ifmpr@center \mpr@centertrue
+\def \mpr@htovlist {%
+   \setbox \mpr@hlist
+      \hbox {\strut
+             \ifmpr@center \hskip -0.5\wd\mpr@hlist\fi
+             \unhbox \mpr@hlist}%
+   \setbox \mpr@vlist
+      \vbox {\if@premisse  \box \mpr@hlist \unvbox \mpr@vlist
+             \else \unvbox \mpr@vlist \box \mpr@hlist
+             \fi}%
+}
+% OLD version
+% \def \mpr@htovlist {%
+%    \setbox \mpr@hlist
+%       \hbox {\strut \hskip -0.5\wd\mpr@hlist \unhbox \mpr@hlist}%
+%    \setbox \mpr@vlist
+%       \vbox {\if@premisse  \box \mpr@hlist \unvbox \mpr@vlist
+%              \else \unvbox \mpr@vlist \box \mpr@hlist
+%              \fi}%
+% }
+
+\def \mpr@item #1{$\displaystyle #1$}
+\def \mpr@sep{2em}
+\def \mpr@blank { }
+\def \mpr@hovbox #1#2{\hbox
+  \bgroup
+  \ifx #1T\@premissetrue
+  \else \ifx #1B\@premissefalse
+  \else
+     \PackageError{mathpartir}
+       {Premisse orientation should either be T or B}
+       {Fatal error in Package}%
+  \fi \fi
+  \def \@test {#2}\ifx \@test \mpr@blank\else
+  \setbox \mpr@hlist \hbox {}%
+  \setbox \mpr@vlist \vbox {}%
+  \if@premisse \let \snoc \mpr@cons \else \let \snoc \mpr@snoc \fi
+  \let \@hvlist \empty \let \@rev \empty
+  \mpr@tmpdim 0em
+  \expandafter \mpr@makelist #2\mpr@to \mpr@flat
+  \if@premisse \mpr@rev \mpr@flat \mpr@to \@rev \else \let \@rev \mpr@flat \fi
+  \def \\##1{%
+     \def \@test {##1}\ifx \@test \empty
+        \mpr@htovlist
+        \mpr@tmpdim 0em %%% last bug fix not extensively checked
+     \else
+      \setbox0 \hbox{\mpr@item {##1}}\relax
+      \advance \mpr@tmpdim by \wd0
+      %\mpr@tmpdim 1.02\mpr@tmpdim
+      \ifnum \mpr@tmpdim < \hsize
+         \ifnum \wd\mpr@hlist > 0
+           \if@premisse
+             \setbox \mpr@hlist 
+                \hbox {\unhbox0 \hskip \mpr@sep \unhbox \mpr@hlist}%
+           \else
+             \setbox \mpr@hlist
+                \hbox {\unhbox \mpr@hlist  \hskip \mpr@sep \unhbox0}%
+           \fi
+         \else 
+         \setbox \mpr@hlist \hbox {\unhbox0}%
+         \fi
+      \else
+         \ifnum \wd \mpr@hlist > 0
+            \mpr@htovlist 
+            \mpr@tmpdim \wd0
+         \fi
+         \setbox \mpr@hlist \hbox {\unhbox0}%
+      \fi
+      \advance \mpr@tmpdim by \mpr@sep
+   \fi
+   }%
+   \@rev
+   \mpr@htovlist
+   \ifmpr@center \hskip \wd\mpr@vlist\fi \box \mpr@vlist
+   \fi
+   \egroup
+}
+
+%%% INFERENCE RULES
+
+\@ifundefined{@@over}{%
+    \let\@@over\over % fallback if amsmath is not loaded
+    \let\@@overwithdelims\overwithdelims
+    \let\@@atop\atop \let\@@atopwithdelims\atopwithdelims
+    \let\@@above\above \let\@@abovewithdelims\abovewithdelims
+  }{}
+
+%% The default
+
+\def \mpr@@fraction #1#2{\hbox {\advance \hsize by -0.5em
+    $\displaystyle {#1\mpr@over #2}$}}
+\def \mpr@@nofraction #1#2{\hbox {\advance \hsize by -0.5em
+    $\displaystyle {#1\@@atop #2}$}}
+
+\let \mpr@fraction \mpr@@fraction
+
+%% A generic solution to arrow
+
+\def \mpr@make@fraction #1#2#3#4#5{\hbox {%
+     \def \mpr@tail{#1}%
+     \def \mpr@body{#2}%
+     \def \mpr@head{#3}%
+     \setbox1=\hbox{$#4$}\setbox2=\hbox{$#5$}%
+     \setbox3=\hbox{$\mkern -3mu\mpr@body\mkern -3mu$}%
+     \setbox3=\hbox{$\mkern -3mu \mpr@body\mkern -3mu$}%
+     \dimen0=\dp1\advance\dimen0 by \ht3\relax\dp1\dimen0\relax
+     \dimen0=\ht2\advance\dimen0 by \dp3\relax\ht2\dimen0\relax
+     \setbox0=\hbox {$\box1 \@@atop \box2$}%
+     \dimen0=\wd0\box0
+     \box0 \hskip -\dimen0\relax
+     \hbox to \dimen0 {$%
+       \mathrel{\mpr@tail}\joinrel
+       \xleaders\hbox{\copy3}\hfil\joinrel\mathrel{\mpr@head}%
+     $}}}
+
+%% Old stuff should be removed in next version
+\def \mpr@@nothing #1#2
+    {$\lower 0.01pt \mpr@@nofraction {#1}{#2}$}
+\def \mpr@@reduce #1#2{\hbox
+    {$\lower 0.01pt \mpr@@fraction {#1}{#2}\mkern -15mu\rightarrow$}}
+\def \mpr@@rewrite #1#2#3{\hbox
+    {$\lower 0.01pt \mpr@@fraction {#2}{#3}\mkern -8mu#1$}}
+\def \mpr@infercenter #1{\vcenter {\mpr@hovbox{T}{#1}}}
+
+\def \mpr@empty {}
+\def \mpr@inferrule
+  {\bgroup
+     \ifnum \linewidth<\hsize \hsize \linewidth\fi
+     \mpr@rulelineskip
+     \let \and \qquad
+     \let \hva \mpr@hva
+     \let \@rulename \mpr@empty
+     \let \@rule@options \mpr@empty
+     \let \mpr@over \@@over
+     \mpr@inferrule@}
+\newcommand {\mpr@inferrule@}[3][]
+  {\everymath={\displaystyle}%       
+   \def \@test {#2}\ifx \empty \@test
+      \setbox0 \hbox {$\vcenter {\mpr@hovbox{B}{#3}}$}%
+   \else 
+   \def \@test {#3}\ifx \empty \@test
+      \setbox0 \hbox {$\vcenter {\mpr@hovbox{T}{#2}}$}%
+   \else
+   \setbox0 \mpr@fraction {\mpr@hovbox{T}{#2}}{\mpr@hovbox{B}{#3}}%
+   \fi \fi
+   \def \@test {#1}\ifx \@test\empty \box0
+   \else \vbox 
+%%% Suggestion de Francois pour les etiquettes longues
+%%%   {\hbox to \wd0 {\RefTirName {#1}\hfil}\box0}\fi
+      {\hbox {\RefTirName {#1}}\box0}\fi
+   \egroup}
+
+\def \mpr@vdotfil #1{\vbox to #1{\leaders \hbox{$\cdot$} \vfil}}
+
+% They are two forms
+% \inferrule [label]{[premisses}{conclusions}
+% or
+% \inferrule* [options]{[premisses}{conclusions}
+%
+% Premisses and conclusions are lists of elements separated by \\
+% Each \\ produces a break, attempting horizontal breaks if possible, 
+% and  vertical breaks if needed. 
+% 
+% An empty element obtained by \\\\ produces a vertical break in all cases. 
+%
+% The former rule is aligned on the fraction bar. 
+% The optional label appears on top of the rule
+% The second form to be used in a derivation tree is aligned on the last
+% line of its conclusion
+% 
+% The second form can be parameterized, using the key=val interface. The
+% folloiwng keys are recognized:
+%       
+%  width                set the width of the rule to val
+%  narrower             set the width of the rule to val\hsize
+%  before               execute val at the beginning/left
+%  lab                  put a label [Val] on top of the rule
+%  lskip                add negative skip on the right
+%  left                 put a left label [Val]
+%  Left                 put a left label [Val],  ignoring its width 
+%  right                put a right label [Val]
+%  Right                put a right label [Val], ignoring its width
+%  leftskip             skip negative space on the left-hand side
+%  rightskip            skip negative space on the right-hand side
+%  vdots                lift the rule by val and fill vertical space with dots
+%  after                execute val at the end/right
+%  
+%  Note that most options must come in this order to avoid strange
+%  typesetting (in particular  leftskip must preceed left and Left and
+%  rightskip must follow Right or right; vdots must come last 
+%  or be only followed by rightskip. 
+%  
+
+%% Keys that make sence in all kinds of rules
+\def \mprset #1{\setkeys{mprset}{#1}}
+\define@key {mprset}{andskip}[]{\mpr@andskip=#1}
+\define@key {mprset}{lineskip}[]{\lineskip=#1}
+\define@key {mprset}{flushleft}[]{\mpr@centerfalse}
+\define@key {mprset}{center}[]{\mpr@centertrue}
+\define@key {mprset}{rewrite}[]{\let \mpr@fraction \mpr@@rewrite}
+\define@key {mprset}{atop}[]{\let \mpr@fraction \mpr@@nofraction}
+\define@key {mprset}{myfraction}[]{\let \mpr@fraction #1}
+\define@key {mprset}{fraction}[]{\def \mpr@fraction {\mpr@make@fraction #1}}
+\define@key {mprset}{sep}{\def\mpr@sep{#1}}
+
+\newbox \mpr@right
+\define@key {mpr}{flushleft}[]{\mpr@centerfalse}
+\define@key {mpr}{center}[]{\mpr@centertrue}
+\define@key {mpr}{rewrite}[]{\let \mpr@fraction \mpr@@rewrite}
+\define@key {mpr}{myfraction}[]{\let \mpr@fraction #1}
+\define@key {mpr}{fraction}[]{\def \mpr@fraction {\mpr@make@fraction #1}}
+\define@key {mpr}{left}{\setbox0 \hbox {$\TirName {#1}\;$}\relax
+     \advance \hsize by -\wd0\box0}
+\define@key {mpr}{width}{\hsize #1}
+\define@key {mpr}{sep}{\def\mpr@sep{#1}}
+\define@key {mpr}{before}{#1}
+\define@key {mpr}{lab}{\let \RefTirName \TirName \def \mpr@rulename {#1}}
+\define@key {mpr}{Lab}{\let \RefTirName \TirName \def \mpr@rulename {#1}}
+\define@key {mpr}{narrower}{\hsize #1\hsize}
+\define@key {mpr}{leftskip}{\hskip -#1}
+\define@key {mpr}{reduce}[]{\let \mpr@fraction \mpr@@reduce}
+\define@key {mpr}{rightskip}
+  {\setbox \mpr@right \hbox {\unhbox \mpr@right \hskip -#1}}
+\define@key {mpr}{LEFT}{\setbox0 \hbox {$#1$}\relax
+     \advance \hsize by -\wd0\box0}
+\define@key {mpr}{left}{\setbox0 \hbox {$\TirName {#1}\;$}\relax
+     \advance \hsize by -\wd0\box0}
+\define@key {mpr}{Left}{\llap{$\TirName {#1}\;$}}
+\define@key {mpr}{right}
+  {\setbox0 \hbox {$\;\TirName {#1}$}\relax \advance \hsize by -\wd0
+   \setbox \mpr@right \hbox {\unhbox \mpr@right \unhbox0}}
+\define@key {mpr}{RIGHT}
+  {\setbox0 \hbox {$#1$}\relax \advance \hsize by -\wd0
+   \setbox \mpr@right \hbox {\unhbox \mpr@right \unhbox0}}
+\define@key {mpr}{Right}
+  {\setbox \mpr@right \hbox {\unhbox \mpr@right \rlap {$\;\TirName {#1}$}}}
+\define@key {mpr}{vdots}{\def \mpr@vdots {\@@atop \mpr@vdotfil{#1}}}
+\define@key {mpr}{after}{\edef \mpr@after {\mpr@after #1}}
+
+\newcommand \mpr@inferstar@ [3][]{\setbox0
+  \hbox {\let \mpr@rulename \mpr@empty \let \mpr@vdots \relax
+         \setbox \mpr@right \hbox{}%
+         $\setkeys{mpr}{#1}%
+          \ifx \mpr@rulename \mpr@empty \mpr@inferrule {#2}{#3}\else
+          \mpr@inferrule [{\mpr@rulename}]{#2}{#3}\fi
+          \box \mpr@right \mpr@vdots$}
+  \setbox1 \hbox {\strut}
+  \@tempdima \dp0 \advance \@tempdima by -\dp1
+  \raise \@tempdima \box0}
+
+\def \mpr@infer {\@ifnextchar *{\mpr@inferstar}{\mpr@inferrule}}
+\newcommand \mpr@err@skipargs[3][]{}
+\def \mpr@inferstar*{\ifmmode 
+    \let \@do \mpr@inferstar@
+  \else 
+    \let \@do \mpr@err@skipargs
+    \PackageError {mathpartir}
+      {\string\inferrule* can only be used in math mode}{}%
+  \fi \@do}
+
+
+%%% Exports
+
+% Envirnonment mathpar
+
+\let \inferrule \mpr@infer
+
+% make a short name \infer is not already defined
+\@ifundefined {infer}{\let \infer \mpr@infer}{}
+
+\def \TirNameStyle #1{\small \textsc{#1}}
+\def \tir@name #1{\hbox {\small \TirNameStyle{#1}}}
+\let \TirName \tir@name
+\let \DefTirName \TirName
+\let \RefTirName \TirName
+
+%%% Other Exports
+
+% \let \listcons \mpr@cons
+% \let \listsnoc \mpr@snoc
+% \let \listhead \mpr@head
+% \let \listmake \mpr@makelist
+
+
+
+
+\endinput
diff -r 00ac265b251b -r 02b6fab379ba Journal/document/root.bib
--- /dev/null	Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
+++ b/Journal/document/root.bib	Sat Jul 27 08:17:54 2013 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+@inproceedings{Krauss10,
+  author    = {A.~Krauss},
+  title     = {{R}ecursive {D}efinitions of {M}onadic {F}unctions},
+  booktitle = {Proc.~of the Workshop on Partiality and Recursion in Interactive
+               Theorem Provers},
+  year      = {2010},
+  pages     = {1-13},
+  series    = {EPTCS},
+  volume    = {43}
+}
+
+@PhdThesis{Myreen09,
+  author =	 {M.~O.~Myreen},
+  title = 	 {{F}ormal {V}erification of {M}achine-{C}ode {P}rograms},
+  year = 	 2009,
+  school =  {University of Cambridge}
+}
+
+@article{Nipkow98,
+  author={T.~Nipkow},
+  title={{W}inskel is (almost) {R}ight: {T}owards a {M}echanized {S}emantics {T}extbook},
+  journal={Formal Aspects of Computing},
+  volume=10,
+  pages={171--186},
+  year=1998
+}
+
+@inproceedings{Jensen13,
+  author    = {J.~Braband Jensen and
+               N.~Benton and
+               A.~Kennedy},
+  title     = {{H}igh-{L}evel {S}eparation {L}ogic for {L}ow-{L}evel {C}ode},
+  booktitle = {Proc.~of the 40th Symposium on Principles
+               of Programming Languages (POPL)},
+  year      = {2013},
+  pages     = {301--314}
+}
+
+@article{UrbanCheneyBerghofer11,
+  author = {C.~Urban and J.~Cheney and S.~Berghofer},
+  title = {{M}echanizing the {M}etatheory of {LF}},
+  journal = {ACM Transactions on Computational Logic},
+  volume = {12},
+  issue = {2},
+  year = {2011},
+  pages = {15:1--15:42}
+}
+
+@inproceedings{Norrish11,
+  author    = {M.~Norrish},
+  title     = {{M}echanised {C}omputability {T}heory},
+  booktitle = {Proc.~of the 2nd Conference on Interactive Theorem Proving (ITP)},
+  year      = {2011},
+  series    = {LNCS},
+  volume    = {6898},
+  pages     = {297--311}
+}
+
+@inproceedings{AspertiRicciotti12,
+  author    = {A.~Asperti and W.~Ricciotti},
+  title     = {{F}ormalizing {T}uring {M}achines},
+  booktitle = {Proc.~of the 19th International Workshop on Logic, Language, 
+               Information and Computation (WoLLIC)},
+  year      = {2012},
+  pages     = {1-25},
+  series    = {LNCS},
+  volume    = {7456}
+}
+
+
+@Unpublished{WuZhangUrban12,
+  author = 	 {C.~Wu and X.~Zhang and C.~Urban},
+  title = 	 {{A} {F}ormal {M}odel and {C}orrectness {P}roof for an 
+                  {A}ccess {C}ontrol {P}olicy {F}ramework},
+  note = 	 {Submitted},
+  year = 	 {2013}
+}
+
+@book{Boolos87,
+  author    = {G.~Boolos and J.~P.~Burgess and R.~C.~Jeffrey},
+  title     = {{C}omputability and {L}ogic (5th~ed.)},
+  publisher = {Cambridge University Press},
+  year      = {2007}
+}
+
+@book{BoolosFourth,
+  author    = {G.~Boolos and J.~P.~Burgess and R.~C.~Jeffrey},
+  title     = {{C}omputability and {L}ogic (4th~ed.)},
+  publisher = {Cambridge University Press},
+  year      = {2002}
+}
+
+
+@inproceedings{WuZhangUrban11,
+  author    = {C.~Wu and X.~Zhang and C.~Urban},
+  title     = {{A} {F}ormalisation of the {M}yhill-{N}erode {T}heorem based on {R}egular {E}xpressions
+               ({P}roof {P}earl)},
+  booktitle = {Proc.~of the 2nd Conference on Interactive Theorem Proving},
+  year      = {2011},
+  pages     = {341--356},
+  series    = {LNCS},
+  volume    = {6898}
+}
+
+
+@Article{Post36,
+  author =       {E.~Post},
+  title =        {{F}inite {C}ombinatory {P}rocesses-{F}ormulation 1},
+  journal =      {Journal of Symbolic Logic},
+  year =         {1936},
+  volume =       {1},
+  number =       {3},
+  pages =        {103--105}
+}
+
+@article{Dijkstra68,
+  author    = {E.~W.~Dijkstra},
+  title     = {{G}o to {S}tatement {C}onsidered {H}armful},
+  journal   = {Communications of the ACM},
+  volume    = {11},
+  number    = {3},
+  year      = {1968},
+  pages     = {147-148}
+}
+
+
+
+@Book{Berger66,
+  author = 	 {R.~Berger},
+  title = 	 {{T}he {U}ndecidability of the {D}omino {P}roblem},
+  journal = 	 {Memoirs of the American Mathematical Society},
+  year = 	 {1966}
+}
+
+
+@Article{Robinson71,
+  author = 	 {R.~M.~Robinson},
+  title = 	 {{U}ndecidability and {N}onperiodicity for {T}ilings of the {P}lane},
+  journal = 	 {Inventiones Mathematicae},
+  year = 	 {1971},
+  volume = 	 {12},
+  pages = 	 {177--209}
+}
+
+
+@phdthesis{Zammit99,
+author = {V.~Zammit},
+title = {{O}n the {R}eadability of {M}achine {C}heckable {F}ormal {P}roofs},
+year = {1999},
+school = {University of Kent}}
+
diff -r 00ac265b251b -r 02b6fab379ba Journal/document/root.tex
--- /dev/null	Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
+++ b/Journal/document/root.tex	Sat Jul 27 08:17:54 2013 +0200
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+\documentclass[runningheads]{llncs}
+%\documentclass[10pt, conference, compsocconf]{IEEEtran}
+\usepackage{isabelle}
+\usepackage{isabellesym}
+\usepackage{times}
+\usepackage{amssymb}
+\usepackage{amsmath}
+\usepackage{stmaryrd}
+\usepackage{mathpartir}
+\usepackage{pdfsetup}
+\usepackage{tikz}
+\usepackage{pgf}
+\usepackage{color}
+
+%% for testing
+%\usepackage{endnotes}
+%\let\footnote=\endnote
+
+% urls in roman style, theory text in math-similar italics
+\urlstyle{rm}
+\isabellestyle{it}
+
+% gray boxes
+\definecolor{mygrey}{rgb}{.80,.80,.80}
+
+% mathpatir
+\mprset{sep=0.9em}
+\mprset{center=false}
+\mprset{flushleft=true}
+
+% for uniform font size
+%\renewcommand{\isastyle}{\isastyleminor}
+
+\def\dn{\,\stackrel{\mbox{\scriptsize def}}{=}\,}
+\renewcommand{\isasymequiv}{$\dn$}
+\renewcommand{\isasymemptyset}{$\varnothing$}
+\renewcommand{\isacharunderscore}{\mbox{$\_$}}
+\renewcommand{\isasymiota}{}
+\newcommand{\isasymulcorner}{$\ulcorner$}
+\newcommand{\isasymurcorner}{$\urcorner$}
+\begin{document}
+
+
+\title{Mechanising Turing Machines and Computability Theory in Isabelle/HOL}
+\author{Jian Xu\inst{1} \and Xingyuan Zhang\inst{1} \and Christian Urban\inst{2}}
+\institute{PLA University of Science and Technology, China \and King's College London, UK}
+
+\maketitle
+
+
+\begin{abstract}
+We formalise results from computability theory in the theorem prover
+Isabelle/HOL. 
+%This theorem prover is based on classical logic which
+%precludes \emph{direct} reasoning about computability: every boolean
+%predicate is either true or false because of the law of excluded
+%middle. The only way to reason about computability in a classical
+%theorem prover is to formalise a concrete model of computation.  
+Following the textbook by Boolos et al, we formalise Turing machines
+and relate them to abacus machines and recursive functions. We ``tie
+the know'' between these three computational models by formalising a
+universal function and obtaining from it a universal Turing machine by
+our verified translation from recursive functions to abacus programs
+and from abacus programs to Turing machine programs.  Hoare-style reasoning techniques allow us
+to reason about concrete Turing machine and abacus programs. 
+%Our theory can be
+%used to formalise other computability results.
+%We give one example about the computational equivalence of 
+%single-sided Turing machines. 
+%{\it we give one example about the undecidability of Wang's tiling problem, whose proof uses
+%the notion of a universal Turing machine.}
+\end{abstract}
+
+% generated text of all theories
+\input{session}
+
+% optional bibliography
+\bibliographystyle{abbrv}
+\bibliography{root}
+
+\end{document}
+
+%%% Local Variables:
+%%% mode: latex
+%%% TeX-master: t
+%%% End:
diff -r 00ac265b251b -r 02b6fab379ba ROOT
--- a/ROOT	Sat Jul 27 08:14:01 2013 +0200
+++ b/ROOT	Sat Jul 27 08:17:54 2013 +0200
@@ -17,6 +17,11 @@
   theories
     "Paper"
 
+session Journal in Journal = UTM +
+  options [document = pdf, document_output = "..", document_variants = "journal"]
+  theories
+    "Paper"
+
 session Slides1 in Slides = UTM +
   options [document = pdf, document_output = "..", document_variants = "slides1"]
   theories